Garmin g3000 190-01597-00 - D PDF

G3000™ Integrated Avionics System
Line Maintenance Manual
190-01597-00 November 2014 Revision D

____________________________________________________________________
© Copyright 2014
Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual
and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and
to print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy
of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further
that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin International, Inc.

1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913-397-8200
Aviation Panel-Mount Technical Support Line (Toll Free): 1-888-606-5482
www.garmin.com
Garmin Ltd. (Europe)

Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p: 44/0870.8501241 f: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin®, FliteCharts® and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
Garmin SVT™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
Sirius®, XM®, and all associated trademarks or registered trademarks of Sirius XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
©1984–2012.
i
____________________________________________________________________
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Date Section Pages Description

1TP 9/12/11 ---- ---- Initial Draft
2TP 1/20/13 All All Comprehensive Revision;
revised manual part number.
A 3-20-13 ---- ---- Initial Release
B 7-12-13 8 8-3 Revised Clearing Default User
Settings procedure in Section
8.3.1.
Appendix A All Revised “P” and “J” connector
designations.
C 11/5/2014 4.3.14 4-38 Added note to GTC Fan Fail
Message
5.16.1 5-11 Added GTC 570 Fan
Replacement Procedure
D 11/14/14 5 5-11 Added note: The enhanced GTC
fan replacement kit does not
affect current GTC envelope
sizing.
DOCUMENT PAGINATION
Section Pages
Front Matter i to xii
Section 1 1-1 to 1-4
Appendix A A-1 to A-50
Appendix B B-1 to B-4
The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedure and therefore
do not appear elsewhere in this maintenance manual. These are recommended precautions that personnel
should understand and apply during the many phases of maintenance and repair.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS. Maintenance personnel shall observe all safety regulations
at all times. Turn off system power before making or breaking electrical connections. Regard any
exposed connector, terminal board, or circuit board as a possible shock hazard. Components which retain
a charge shall be discharged only when such grounding does not result in equipment damage. If a test
connection to energized equipment is required, make the test equipment ground connection before
probing the voltage or signal to be tested.
DO NOT SERVICE ALONE. Personnel shall not under any circumstances reach into or enter any
enclosure for the purpose of servicing or adjusting the equipment without immediate presence or
assistance of another person capable of rendering aid.
ii
____________________________________________________________________
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

“This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations
(“EAR”) issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII Subchapter C) and
which may not be exported, released or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside the United States
without first obtaining an export license. The preceding statement is required to be included on any and
all reproductions in whole or in part of this manual.”
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This
Notice is being provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you
have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to the
Garmin web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
CAUTION
The GDU lamps contain mercury and must be recycled or disposed of according
to local, state, or federal laws. If you have any questions or would like
additional information, please refer to our web site at the following website:
www.garmin.com/aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
CAUTION
The GDU lens is coated with a special anti-reflective coating which is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very
important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and a premium off the
shelf LCD screen cleaner that is anti-static, alcohol and sodium lauryl
sulfate free and safe for AR coatings.
iii
____________________________________________________________________
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 — INTRODUCTION
1.1 MAINTENANCE CONCEPT/SCOPE .................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Garmin Documents................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1.1 Pilot’s Guides ......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1.2 Garmin Installation Manuals .................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 MANUAL ORGANIZATION ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.4 LIMITED WARRANTY........................................................................................................ 1-3
SECTION 2 — G3000 DESCRIPTION
2.1 SYSTEM/LRU DESCRIPTIONS .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................................................. 2-4
SECTION 3 — G3000 CONTROL AND OPERATION
3.1 SYSTEM POWER-UP ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 G3000 CONTROLS ............................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 PFD Controls .......................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Touchscreen Controller .......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.3 GDU Controllers .................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.3 DATA ENTRY .................................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS ...................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.1 G3000 - GDU SD Cards ....................................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.2 ReadyBoost .......................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.5 G3000 MODES OF OPERATION ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.5.1 Normal Mode ...................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.5.2 GDUs .................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.5.3 Touchscreen Controllers ...................................................................................................... 3-24
3.5.4 Reversionary GDU Operation .............................................................................................. 3-25
3.5.5 Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................ 3-25
3.5.6 'SET' AND 'ACTIVE' Commands ........................................................................................ 3-26
3.5.7 SET and ACTIVE Softkeys ................................................................................................. 3-26
iv
____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 4 — TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 VISUAL HARDWARE INSPECTION ................................................................................. 4-2
4.2 RED OR YELLOW X DISPLAY INDICATIONS ............................................................... 4-2
4.3 G3000 SYSTEM MESSAGES ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.3.1 GCU PFD Controller System Messages .............................................................................. 4-11
4.3.2 GDC Air Data Computer System Messages ........................................................................ 4-11
4.3.3 GDL System Messages ........................................................................................................ 4-12
4.3.4 GDR System Messages ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3.5 GDU System Messages ........................................................................................................ 4-14
4.3.6 GEA System Messages ........................................................................................................ 4-24
4.3.7 GIA System Messages .......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.8 GMA System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3.9 GMC System Messages........................................................................................................ 4-34
4.3.10 GMU System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.11 GRS System Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.3.12 GSD System Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.3.13 GSR System Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-38
4.3.14 GTC System Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-38
4.3.15 GTS System Messages ......................................................................................................... 4-40
4.3.16 GTX System Messages ........................................................................................................ 4-40
4.3.17 GWX System Messages ....................................................................................................... 4-41
4.3.18 Miscellaneous System Messages ......................................................................................... 4-42
4.4 DATA LOGGING AND DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................... 4-44
4.5 GIA AND GDU SERIAL CONFIGURATION PAGE DATA PATH INDICATIONS ...... 4-45
4.6 CONFIGURATION PAGES ................................................................................................ 4-46
4.6.1 General System Awareness .................................................................................................. 4-46
4.6.2 Configuration Page Security and General Information ........................................................ 4-46
4.6.3 Configuration Mode ............................................................................................................. 4-47
4.6.4 Configuration Page Groups and Descriptions ...................................................................... 4-48
4.6.4.1 System Group ....................................................................................................................... 4-49
4.6.4.2 GDU Page Group ................................................................................................................. 4-69
4.6.4.3 GIA Group ............................................................................................................................ 4-89
4.6.4.4 GSD Page Group .................................................................................................................. 4-97
v
____________________________________________________________________
4.6.4.5 GEA Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-102

4.6.4.6 GTX Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-110
4.6.4.7 GRS Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-112
4.6.4.8 ADC Page Group................................................................................................................ 4-115
4.6.4.9 GFC Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-116
4.6.4.10 GMA Page Group............................................................................................................... 4-119
4.6.4.11 GDL Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-125
4.6.4.12 RMT Group ........................................................................................................................ 4-133
4.6.4.13 GWX Page Group .............................................................................................................. 4-135
4.7 COMMON G3000 ISSUES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ......................................... 4-144
4.7.1 GDU .................................................................................................................................. 4-144
4.7.2 GIA .................................................................................................................................... 4-146
4.7.3 WAAS GPS ....................................................................................................................... 4-147
4.7.4 NAV ................................................................................................................................... 4-151
4.7.5 GDC ADC .......................................................................................................................... 4-151
4.7.6 GRS AHRS......................................................................................................................... 4-152
4.7.7 GMA................................................................................................................................... 4-157
4.7.8 XM ..................................................................................................................................... 4-158
4.8 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (AFCS) TROUBLESHOOTING ........... 4-159
4.8.1 AFCS Status Annunciations ............................................................................................... 4-160
4.9 ASSERT (DIAGNOSTIC) LOGS ...................................................................................... 4-162
4.10 LRU EXTERNAL CONNECTOR INFORMATION ........................................................ 4-163
vi
____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 5 — LRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

5.1 GCU PFD CONTROLLER .................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 GDC AIR DATA COMPUTER ............................................................................................. 5-2
5.3 GDL 59 WI-FI DATALINK AND FLIGHT PARAMETER RECORDER .......................... 5-3
5.4 GDL 69A XM WEATHER AND RADIO DATA LINK ...................................................... 5-4
5.5 GDU DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................................................................... 5-5
5.6 GEA ENGINE AND AIRFRAME INTERFACE UNIT ....................................................... 5-5
5.7 GIA INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT ................................................................................ 5-6
5.8 GMA AUDIO PROCESSOR AND MARKER BEACON RECEIVER................................ 5-6
5.9 GMC AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER ....................................................................... 5-7
5.10 GRS AHRS AND GMU MAGNETOMETER ..................................................................... 5-7
5.11 GSA SERVO ACTUATOR/GSM SERVO GEARBOX ....................................................... 5-9
5.12 GSC SIGNAL CONDITIONER............................................................................................. 5-9
5.13 GSD DATA CONCENTRATOR ........................................................................................ 5-10
5.14 GSR IRIDIUM SATELLITE TRANSCEIVER ................................................................... 5-10
5.15 GTA TRIM ADAPTOR ....................................................................................................... 5-10
5.16 GTC TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER............................................................................ 5-11
5.16.1 GTC 570 Fan Replacement Procedure ................................................................................. 5-11
5.17 GTS TCAS II PROCESSOR ................................................................................................ 5-14
5.18 GTX TRANSPONDER........................................................................................................ 5-14
5.19 GWX AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR............................................................................ 5-15
5.20 CONFIGURATION MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ............................... 5-15
5.21 GEA BACKSHELL THERMOCOUPLE REMOVAL and REPLACEMENT .................. 5-16
vii
____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 6 — LRU SOFTWARE LOADING, CONFIGURATION, and TESTING

6.1 PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Clearing Default User Settings............................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 LOADING LRU SOFTWARE .............................................................................................. 6-2
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1 G3000 In-Air Configuration Lockout .................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.2 Avionics Status Shows Amber/Red Checkbox ...................................................................... 6-3
6.3.3 Software Not Loading to LRU ............................................................................................... 6-4
SECTION 7 — PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

7.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES .................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Pitot/Static Leak Test ............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Altimeter (GDC 7400 and PFD) ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.3 Airspeed Function Test (GDC 7400 and PFD) ...................................................................... 7-1
7.1.4 Vertical Speed Indicator (GDC 7400 and PFD) .................................................................... 7-1
7.1.5 GTX Transponder .................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.6 GRS Earth Magnetic Field Updates ....................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.7 GA Antenna............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.8 GIA IAU ................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.9 GCU PFD Controller .............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.10 GDC Air Data Computer ........................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.11 GDL 59 ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.12 GDL 69 ................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.13 GDU Display .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.14 GEA Engine and Airframe Unit ............................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.15 GMA Audio Controller .......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.16 GMC AFCS Mode Controller ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.17 GMU Magnetometer .............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.18 GRS AHRS............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.19 GSA Servo Actuator/GSM Servo Gearbox ............................................................................ 7-2
7.1.20 GSD Data Concentrator ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.21 GSR Iridium Satellite Transceiver ......................................................................................... 7-2
viii
____________________________________________________________________
7.1.22 GTA Trim Adapter ................................................................................................................. 7-3

7.1.23 GTC Touchscreen Controller ................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.24 GTS Processor ........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.25 GTX Transponder .................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.26 GWX Weather Radar ............................................................................................................. 7-3
SECTION 8 — LOADING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
8.1 SOFTWARE LOADER CARD ............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 VERIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 System Status Verification ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.2 System Software Verification ................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.3 Aircraft Optional Software Verification ................................................................................ 8-2
8.3 AIRCRAFT BASE SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION (INSTALL)..................................... 8-3
8.3.1 Clearing Default User Settings............................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.2 Loading Procedures ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE LOADING .......................................................................... 8-6
8.5 AIRCRAFT OPTIONS (INSTALL) ...................................................................................... 8-6
8.6 AIRFRAME CONFIGURATIONS OPTIONS (INSTALL) ................................................. 8-7
8.7 AIRCRAFT OPTIONS (REMOVAL) ................................................................................... 8-8
8.8 TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................................................... 8-9
8.8.1 G3000 In-Air Configuration Lockout .................................................................................... 8-9
8.8.2 Avionics Status Shows Amber/Red Checkbox ...................................................................... 8-9
8.8.3 Software Not Loading to LRU ............................................................................................... 8-9
8.9 AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION......................................................................................... 8-10
8.9.1 Transponders and TCAS ...................................................................................................... 8-10
8.10 DATABASE LOADING PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 8-11
8.10.1 Jeppesen Databases .............................................................................................................. 8-11
8.10.2 Dual Navigation Database Feature ...................................................................................... 8-12
8.10.3 Automatic Database Synchronization Feature ..................................................................... 8-14
8.10.4 Garmin Databases ................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.11 RETURN TO SERVICE PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 8-21
8.11.1 Software Integrity Check...................................................................................................... 8-21
8.11.2 Air Data, Attitude, Heading Tests ........................................................................................ 8-21
8.11.3 Navigation Tests ................................................................................................................... 8-21
ix
____________________________________________________________________
8.11.4 VHF COM Tests .................................................................................................................. 8-21

8.11.5 Transponder and TCAS Tests .............................................................................................. 8-21
8.11.6 EICAS Indications ................................................................................................................ 8-22
8.11.7 Autopilot Operations ............................................................................................................ 8-22
8.11.8 GTC Operations ................................................................................................................... 8-22
x
____________________________________________________________________
APPENDIX A — LRU CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS

A.1 GDU DISPLAY UNIT ............................................................................................. A-1
A.2 GTC TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLER................................................................ A-4
A.3 GIA INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT .................................................................. A-6
A.4 GDC AIR DATA COMPUTER ............................................................................. A-18
A.5 GEA ENGINE AND AIRFRAME INTERFACE UNIT ....................................... A-20
A.6 GRS AHRS............................................................................................................. A-24
A.7 GMU MAGNETOMETER .................................................................................... A-25
A.8 GMA AUDIO PROCESSOR AND MARKER BEACON RECEIVER................ A-26
A.9 GDL 69A XM WEATHER AND RADIO DATA LINK ...................................... A-30
A.10 GDL 59 WI-FI DATALINK AND FLIGHT PARAMETER RECORDER .......... A-32
A.11 GSR IRIDIUM SATELLITE TRANSCEIVER ..................................................... A-34
A.12 GMC AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER ....................................................... A-35
A.13 GWX AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR.............................................................. A-36
A.14 GSD DATA CONCENTRATOR .......................................................................... A-38
A.15 GSA SERVO ACTUATOR ................................................................................... A-42
A.16 GTA TRIM ADAPTOR ......................................................................................... A-43
A.17 GTS TCAS II SYSTEM ......................................................................................... A-44
A.18 GCU PFD CONTROLLER .................................................................................... A-50
APPENDIX B — AFM/AFMS/POH CONSIDERATIONS

B.1 GARMIN GNSS NAVIGATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT APPROVALS ........... B-1
B.2 GARMIN GNSS NAVIGATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ................................. B-2
xi
____________________________________________________________________
Blank Page
xii
SECTION 1—INTRODUCTION
NOTE
The procedures and methods described in this manual are generic and are intended to only
familiarize the technician with general troubleshooting methods and procedures. The
information depicted in the display pages are for reference only—always refer to approved
airframe specific information before performing maintenance. Different aircraft
manufacturers may employ various methods to suit a particular installation—always use
approved OEM documents for aircraft checkouts.
NOTE
All visual depictions contained within this manual, including screen images of the G3000 panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G3000 system and
aviation databases. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
1.1 MAINTENANCE CONCEPT/SCOPE
Performing maintenance on the G3000 consists of (is limited to):
• Identifying and replacing faulty Line Replaceable Units (LRUs).
• Loading LRU and system level software and configuration files, and any follow-up testing that may be
needed to verify a correct load.
There is no component level repair on any part of the system or any repair of an individual LRU. This manual
contains no schematic diagrams. No special tools or equipment are needed to perform maintenance on the G3000.
1.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
The following publications supplement the information contained in this maintenance manual.
1.2.1 Garmin Documents
1.2.1.1 Pilot’s Guide
• Garmin G3000 Pilot’s Guide for the applicable aircraft model.
1.2.1.2 Garmin Installation Manuals
• GCU PFD Controller-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-75
• GDC Air Data Computer-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-01100-00
• GDL 59 WI-FI Datalink and Flight Parameter Recorder-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number:
190-00837-00
• GDL 69A XM Weather and Radio Data Link-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00355-02
• GDU Display Unit-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-28
• GEA Engine And Airframe Interface Unit-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-40
• GIA Integrated Avionics Unit-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-05
• GMA Audio Processor And Marker Beacon Receiver-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number:
190-00858-01
• GMC Autopilot Mode Controller-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-70
• GRS AHRS and GMU 44 Magnetometer-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-01091-00
• GSA Servo Actuator/GSM 9100 Servo Gearbox-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number:
190-00303-85
• GSD Data Concentrator-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-26
G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 1-1
190-01597-00 Revision D
• GSR Iridium Satellite Transceiver-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00836-00
• GTA Trim Adaptor-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-74
• GTC Touch Screen Controller-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00987-00
• GTS TCAS II Processor-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00587-50
• GTX Transponder-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00926-01
• GWX Airborne Weather Radar-Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00829-01
1.3 MANUAL ORGANIZATION
Section 1 gives introductory manual information. Section 2 provides a basic description of the G3000. Section 3
describes basic G3000 control and operation. Section 4 contains troubleshooting information. Section 5 describes
how remove and install a faulty LRU. Section 6 describes how to load LRU software. Section 7 contains periodic
maintenance requirements for the system. Section 8 explains how to load and configure system software. This
section also includes return to service procedures. Appendix A contains LRU external connector pin names and
numbers. Appendix B contains pertinent AFM, AFMS, and/or POH information as it relates to the G3000.
Page 1-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Revision D 190-01597-00
1.4 LIMITED WARRANTY
All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for: two years
from the date of purchase for new Remote-Mount and Panel-Mount products; one year from the date of purchase
for new portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products; six months for newly-overhauled
products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center; and 90 days for factory repaired or newly-
overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair. Within the applicable period, Garmin will, at its sole
option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no
charge to the customer for parts or labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation
cost. This warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable
parts, such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii)
damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or other acts of nature or external causes; (iv)
damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin; or (v)
damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition,
Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in
contravention of the laws of any country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY
LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC
LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN
THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Garmin
retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product
or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage.
Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or
copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from
any package purchased through an online auction.
International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices
purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is provided by the local
in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device. Distributor warranties are only
valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to
the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the United States, Canada, or Taiwan for service.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Blank Page

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 2—G3000 DESCRIPTION
2.1 SYSTEM/LRU DESCRIPTIONS

The G3000 is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the flight crew using flat-panel color displays and Touchscreen
Controllers. The system consists of the Line Replaceable Units (LRUs) listed in the table below. Note that some
units may not be present in all installations.
LRU Description Notes

GDU Display Unit Each unit is configured as one of two PFDs or an MFD. The
unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD1, and the
one installed on the right/copilot side is designated as PFD2.
The unit installed in the center is designated the MFD.
These units communicate with each other, with the GTC units,
and with the on-side GIA through a High-Speed Data Bus
(HSDB) connection.
GTC Touch Screen Two units are installed. The unit installed on the left/pilot side
Controller is designated as GTC1, and the one installed on the right/copilot
side is designated as GTC2.
These units communicate with the GDUs via High-Speed Data
Bus (HSDB) connection.
GIA Integrated Each GIA contains a GPS/WAAS receiver, VHF
Avionics Unit COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD), aircraft I/O
interfaces, and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA is
paired with the on-side PFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
units communicate directly with each other via the CAN
protocol only when a system data path failure has occurred.
GDC Air Data Computer Processes data from the pitot/static system. This unit provides
pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the system, and it communicates with the GIAs and GDUs via
ARINC 429.
GEA Engine and Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe
Airframe Interface sensors. This unit communicates with both GIAs using an RS-
Unit 485 digital interface.
GRS AHRS Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC
429 to the GDUs and GIAs. The GRS contains advanced
sensors (including accelerometers and rate sensors) and
interfaces with the on-side GMU to obtain magnetic field
information, with the GDC to obtain air data, and with both
GIAs to obtain GPS information.
GMU Magnetometer Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit
receives power directly from the GRS and communicates with
the GRS using an RS-485 digital interface.

190-01597-00 Revision D
GMA Audio Processor Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system, and
and Marker marker beacon functions. Each GMA communicates with its on-
Beacon Receiver side GTC via HSDB and cross-side GIA via RS-232 as a backup
control path.
GTX Transponder Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C and S
capability. The GTX supports diversity antennas, European
enhanced surveillance, and ADS-B 1090 MHz extended squitter
transmit capabilities.
Each transponder communicates via RS-422 digital interface and
has an optional RS-232 backup connection for increased
availability.
GDL 69A XM Weather and A satellite radio receiver that provides (throughout North
Radio Datalink America) real-time weather information to the MFD and PFD
Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A
communicates via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69A’s XM
capabilities.
GRC XM Controller Remote controller that allows passengers to adjust the volume
and channel of the GDL 69A XM radio. The GRC
communicates wirelessly with the GRT.
GRT XM Controller Transceiver that communicates with the GTC wirelessly and the
Transceiver GDL 69A via RS-232.
GDL 59 Wi-Fi Datalink Provides system WI-FI connectivity. The GDL 59
and Flight communicates via HSDB connection. The GDL 59 may
Parameter optionally communicate with one or two GSR 56 units via RS-
Recorder 232. Computers or Electronic Flight Bags (EFBs) may also be
connected through three Ethernet ports.
GSR Iridium Satellite Provides voice and data communication via the Iridium satellite
Transceiver network. The GSR communicates via RS-232.
GMC AFCS Mode Provides the controls for the AFCS through an RS-232 digital
Controller interface allowing communication with both PFDs.
GWX Airborne Weather Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data via
Radar HSDB connection.
GSD Data Concentrator This unit is a data concentrator used to expand the input and
output capabilities of the system. Communication is through
HSDB.
GSA Servo Actuator The GSA units are used for the automatic control of pitch, roll,
and yaw. These units interface with both GIA via RS-485.
GSM Servo Gearbox The GSM units transfer the output torque of the GSA servo
actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
GTA Trim Adaptor The GSA units are used for the automatic trim for pitch, roll,
and/or yaw. These units interface with both GIA via RS-485.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GA 36 GPS/WAAS Through-mount GPS/WAAS antenna.
Antenna
GA 37 GPS/WAAS and Through-mount GPS/WAAS antenna with XM/Data Link.
XM Antenna
GDR Digital Radio Digital radio with VDL Mode 2 capabilities.
GTS 820 TAS Traffic Traffic advisory system. The GTS communicates via HSDB.
System
GTS 850 TCAS I Traffic TCAS I traffic detection system. The GTS communicates via
System HSDB.
GTS TAS, TCAS I, The GTS Processor is an aircraft-installed surveillance product
Processor TCAS II that includes both active surveillance (TAS, TCAS I, or TCAS II
configurable) and passive surveillance (ADS-B).
GPA Power Amplifier Power amplifier used with the GTS 820 and GTS 850 units.
GA 58 Traffic Antenna Directional antenna for use GTS 820 and GTS 850.
GCU PFD Control Unit Controls PFD operation.

190-01597-00 Revision D
2.2 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
GTX 1
(Transponder)
GSD1
(Data
Concentrator)
GMC
(AFCS Mode
Sensor Data Controller)
Sensor Data
to GIA2 to GIA1
GCU GCU
(PFD Controller) (PFD Controller)
PFD1 GTC1 MFD GTC2 PFD2

ADC1 (Primary Flight (Touchscreen (Multi Function (Touchscreen (Primary Flight ADC2
(Air Data Display) Controller) Display) Controller) Display) (Air Data
Computer) Computer)
GWX
(Weather
Radar)
GMA1 GMA2
(Audio (Audio
Processor) Processor)
GIA1 GIA2
(Integrated (Integrated
Avionics) Avionics)
GEA1
COM COM
(Engine &
GPS/WAAS GPS/WAAS
Airframe I/F)
AHRS1 VOR/LOC VOR/LOC AHRS2
GPS Data GPS Data
(Attitude & G/S G/S (Attitude &
to AHRS2 to AHRS1
Heading) Flight Director GEA2 Flight Director Heading)
I/O (Engine & I/O
Airframe I/F)
MAG1 MAG2
GEA3
(Magnet- (Magnet-
(Engine &
ometer) ometer)
Airframe I/F)
GSA-Pitch GTX 2
RS-422
(Transponder)
RS-485 GSA-Roll
RS-232
CAN GSA-Yaw
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB)
ARINC 429 GSA-Pitch Trim
Optional connection or equipment
GTX 1 GTX 2
(Transponder) (Transponder)
GEA3
(Engine &
Airframe I/F)
GSD1 GSD2 GWX

(Data (Data (Weather
Concentrator) Concentrator) Radar)
PFD1 GTC1 MFD GTC2 PFD2

(Primary Flight (Touchscreen (Multi Function (Touchscreen (Primary Flight
Display) Controller) Display) Controller) Display)
Figure 2-1. Generic G3000 System

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 3—G3000 CONTROL and OPERATION
NOTE
For G3000 systems without the GCU PFD Controller installed, data entry and configuration page
operations are performed using the GTC Touchscreen Controller in configuration mode.
A basic knowledge on how to operate the G3000 is needed to perform maintenance. Refer to the applicable
G3000 Pilot’s Guide if more detailed information is required.
3.1 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The G3000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The GDUs, Touchscreen Controllers, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous
built-in test features that exercise the processors, memory, external inputs, and outputs.
During system power-up (Figures 3-2 through 3-4) the system displays test annunciations on the GDUs. All
system annunciations should be extinguished typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up,
annunciator lights on the AFCS Controller illuminate momentarily. The Touchscreen Controllers display the
Initialization Screen.
On the PFDs, the AHRS initializes and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should display
valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash display (Figure 3-1) shows the following information:
• System Version
• Copyright
• Checklist name and version
• Basemap Land database and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• ChartView database information

190-01597-00 Revision D
Figure 3-1. MFD Splash Screen with Information
Current database information includes database type, cycle number, or valid operating dates. Review the listed
information for currency (to ensure no databases have expired).
Pressing the right-most softkey on the MFD acknowledges this information, and then shows the EICAS (Engine
Indication and Crew Alerting System) Display, the Summary Pane (in Half Mode), and the Navigation Map Pane
(in Half Mode). When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the system
displays the aircraft’s current position on the Navigation Map Pane.
Figure 3-2. PFD1 Power Up Figure 3-3. MFD Power Up

Revision D 190-01597-00
Figure 3-4. Touchscreen Controller Initialization Screen
3.2 G3000 CONTROLS

Controls are located on the GDU bezels and controllers, the Touchscreen Controllers, and the AFCS Controller.
GDU controls and the Touchscreen Controllers are discussed in this section. AFCS controls are described in the
AFCS section. See the Audio and CNS Section in the Pilot’s Guide for detailed information about NAV/COM,
intercom, and transponder controls.
3.2.1 PFD Controls
Figure 3-5. PFD Softkeys

190-01597-00 Revision D
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the PFD. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. There are
three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey label
displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by the
softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option. The
last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also, these
softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled, the
softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
3.2.2 Touchscreen Controller
The Touchscreen Controllers are pedestal-mounted user interfaces allowing for ease of data entry, display pane
operation, and NAV/COM tuning. The CNS Bar at the top of the Touchscreen Controller screen provides radio
tuning capability (refer to the Audio and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM tuning).
Figure 3-6. GTC Touchscreen Controller

Revision D 190-01597-00
The Touchscreen Controller’s functions are arranged by screen. Each screen has a title which appears at the top
of the screen area (and below the CNS bar). The contents of each screen change dynamically in response to flight
crew or system input. All of the Touchscreen Controller’s available functions are accessible from the Home
Screen. This screen is displayed after the Initialization Screen.
The Home Screen may also be accessed any time it is not currently displayed by touching the Home button in the
Button Bar below the screen area. Procedures generally begin from the Home Screen as a reference point;
however it is not necessary to return to the Home Screen before performing each procedure if the appropriate
screen is already displayed.
Figure 3-7. Touchscreen Controller Screen Navigation

190-01597-00 Revision D
As the Touchscreen Controller is used, certain selections will cause another screen to be displayed. To return
to the previous screen, touch the Back Button or the Cancel Button (shown during data input), or touch the
the Home Button to return to the Home Screen. If the Home Screen was the previous screen, pressing either
the Back or Home Button will also return to the Home Screen. The CNS Bar, positioned above the screen area, is
always displayed during system operation and is accessible at any time regardless of what is displayed in the
screen area below. Some functions on the CNS Bar will cause another screen to be displayed in the screen area
below the CNS Bar; however, touching the Back or Cancel Button will return to the previous screen.
Figure 3-8. Accessing Screens with the CNS Bar
The Button Bar, displayed below the screen area, displays the system-level buttons which are context-sensitive.
For example, if scrolling is available on a screen, the Button Bar includes corresponding Up and Down Scroll
Arrow buttons.
Figure 3-9. Button Bar Displays System-Level Buttons
The Button Bar is also where the Home, Cancel, and Back buttons are displayed. If the system issues a
message, the MSG button is shown. Touching this button will display the Messages Screen. The Button Bar
also contains buttons for controlling the size of map displays on the MFD.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Table 3-10. Button Bar Buttons with Functions
The Label Bar, near the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller and above the Joystick and Knobs displays the
current function of each control as a reference. These functions include Map Range adjustment, display pane
selection, radio volume/squelch adjustment, COM radio tuning, and alphanumeric data entry.
Figure 3-11. Label Bar Indicates Context-Sensitive Joystick
The labels change based on the context of the options being performed. The Touchscreen Controller recognizes
input based on a touch, a gesture (such as sliding a finger), or by pressing or turning the Knobs or Joystick.
On-screen buttons can be ‘pressed’ by momentarily touching them and then releasing. It is not necessary to apply
pressure, as the infrared touchscreen surface detects the only the presence and movement of the finger, not
pressure. When touched, the button background is highlighted in blue until the touch is released. If enabled, an
aural ‘click’ sound confirms the system has detected the button touch. When releasing the touch, make sure it
released within the boundary of the button, otherwise the input is considered invalid. If enabled, an aural tone then
indicates the touch input was not accepted. Some adjustments are made using horizontal or vertical sliders. To
use, simply touch within the slider box and slide in the desired slider bar direction, then release. The finger may
move outside of the slider box during adjustment; slider movement stops when either the finger is released or the
slider has reached its maximum travel.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Figure 3-12. Sliders on the Touchscreen Controller
Map Detail Adjustment Slider

When a Touchscreen Controller screen window contains more information than the window can currently
show, a scroll bar and scroll buttons appear. To scroll the contents of the window, touch the controller while
moving the finger up or down accordingly within the window. To scroll more quickly, move the finger up or
down rapidly in a flicking motion. Scrolling can also be performed by pressing the Up or Down scroll buttons.
If additional scrolling is required to view all information in the window, each touch of the scroll button will
display one ‘page’ of information Some screens provide tabs as a means to group multiple categories of
information or buttons. Touch the desired tab to display its contents and manage settings or information. The
Touchscreen Controller highlights the selected tab.
Figure 3-13. Touchscreen Controller with Tabs and Scroll Arrows

Revision D 190-01597-00
Elements on the Touchscreen Controller screens (such as buttons and sliders) appear subdued (dimmed) to
indicate their functions are currently not available.
Figure 3-14. Subdued Buttons on Touchscreen Controller
In some cases, the screen area of the Touchscreen controller (including the buttons) may also appear subdued to
indicate functions on that screen are unavailable while the other Touchscreen Controller is controlling a particular
system resource.
Button Types
Annunciator Buttons operate in an on/off state. An ‘on’ or enabled button displays a green annunciator; an ‘off’
or disabled button displays a gray annunciator. Touch the annunciator button to change its state.
Figure 3-15. Touchscreen Controller Annunciator Buttons

Data field Buttons can be modified based on information the flight crew can enter or edit, and often contain light
blue alphanumeric text. Touching data field button will either display a pop-up window from which a selection
can be made, or display a keypad to supply the data. See the Data Entry discussion in the Pilot’s Guide for more
information.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Figure 3-16. Touchscreen Controller Data Field Buttons
In the CNS bar and the Audio and Radios Screen, if a system failure causes a button’s function to be inaccessible,
a yellow ‘X’ appears over the button. The system does not respond when these buttons are touched.
Figure 3-17. Failed Buttons on Touchscreen Controller

Revision D 190-01597-00
Screens
Home Screen

190-01597-00 Revision D
Revision D 190-01597-00
Aircraft Systems Screen

190-01597-00 Revision D
Services Screen

Revision D 190-01597-00
Utilities Screen

190-01597-00 Revision D
Revision D 190-01597-00
Setup Screen

190-01597-00 Revision D
The Large and Small Right Knobs are used for radio tuning and selection, frequency transfer, and data entry.
Turning the Large Right knob tunes the selected radio frequency in 1 MHz increments; the Small Right Knob
adjusts the frequency in 1 KHz increments. Push the Small Right Knob momentarily to change the selected COM
radio source (COM 1 or COM 2) for tuning. Push and hold the Small Right Knob for 1.5 seconds to transfer the
selected Standby COM frequency to the active COM frequency.
During data entry, turn the Large Right Knob to move the cursor position. Turn the Small Right Knob to select a
character for the highlighted cursor position. Push the Small Right Knob to enter the data.
3.2.3 GDU Controllers
The GDU Controllers are a panel-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry, PFD operation, and
NAV/COM tuning (refer to the Audio and CNS Section in the Pilot’s Guide for detailed information about
NAV/COM tuning). Many procedures in this maintenance manual can be performed using the GDU Controller.
The pilot’s side GDU Controller controls PFD1 and the copilot’s GDU controller controls PFD2.
Figure 3-18. GCU 275 GDU Controller

Revision D 190-01597-00
3.3 DATA ENTRY
Three methods exist for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum
descent altitude) into the system: using the Touchscreen Controller’s alphanumeric keypad, the large and small
right knob on the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller, or the PFD Knob on the GDU Control Unit. In some
instances, such as when entering an identifier, the system will try to predict the desired identifier based on the
characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENTER Button to confirm the
entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters
of the identifier.
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, touching the Find button accesses four
different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan (if active flight plan
waypoints are available), and a Favorite waypoints list. In addition, the system provides the ability to search by
Facility Name or by City. The system will automatically fill in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the
information for the selected waypoint.
Using the Touchscreen Controller keyboard to enter alphanumeric data:
1. Select a Datafield Button the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint, radio
frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the Datafield Button will be highlighted in light blue.
2. Touch the desired letters or numbers, one at a time.
3. If an alphabetic keypad is displayed and numbers are desired, touch the 123... Button.
4. If the numeric keypad is displayed and letters are desired, touch the ABC... Button.
5. To accept the entry, touch the Enter Button. Otherwise, touch the Back, Cancel, or Home Button (on the
Button Bar) to exit the datafield without saving the entry.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Figure 3-19. Entering a Waypoint on the Touchscreen Controller’s Alphanumeric Keypads
It is not necessary to touch the Enter Button to complete certain data fields for which a specific number of
characters is always required. For example, after entering four digit transponder squawk code, the system
automatically accepts this data 1.5 seconds after the fourth button has been pressed (if the entry has not been
cancelled).
Using the Touchscreen Controller’s large and small right knob to enter data:
1. Select a data field button on the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint,
radio frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the data field will be highlighted in light blue.
2. Begin entering data by turning the small right Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
3. Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting
in the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite
direction.
4. Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
5. Repeat, using the small right knob to select a character and the large right knob to move the cursor, until
the field is complete.
6. Press the right knob to confirm entry. Otherwise, touch the Back or Home button to exit the field without
saving the entry.

Revision D 190-01597-00
3.4 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
Each display has secure digital (SD) card slots in the top right portion of the display bezels. SD cards are used for
various functions, including:
Top Slot: software and configuration uploads, navigation database uploads, flight plan upload/download, fixed
content data logging, retrieval of data logged within the GDU.
Bottom Slot: storage of all system databases excluding the navigation database.
The bottom SD card remains in each display during normal operation. The SD card in the top slot can remain
during normal operation or can be removed after use, depending on the specific functions that are being
performed (e.g. for fixed-content data logging the card would remain in the top slot of the MFD; for software or
configuration upload the card would be removed after the upload is complete).
Not all SD cards are compatible with the system. Use only SanDisk SD cards.
1. Install an SD card.
2. Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the
card should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
3. Remove an SD card.
4. Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
Figure 3-20. Display Bezel SD Card Slots

190-01597-00 Revision D
3.4.1 G3000 - GDU SD Cards
Aircraft System Software Loader card

(Qty1)
Jeppesen Navigation Database

(Qty1)
Supplemental Database Card

(Qty3)
1. Terrain (-43 Terrain supports SVS)
2. Obstacles
3. ChartView/FliteCharts (MFD)
optional
4. High Resolution Basemap
5. Checklist (MFD)
6. SafeTaxi
Four Different Cards Typically Used in G3000 Installations:
System
Software
Loader Card
Feature
Enablement
Card
NAVDATA Card
Supplemental
Database
Card
When either the Feature Enablement Card or Supplemental Database Cards are installed in a GDU, the
System ID is written on the card. Once the System ID is written on the card that card will only ever work on
THAT specific aircraft.

Revision D 190-01597-00
3.4.2 ReadyBoost
ReadyBoost allows a USB flash drive or SD card to be used as temporary memory for PC data retrieval.
However:
• ReadyBoost can hijack any SD card plugged into a Windows 7 or Vista PC
• Can make any Garmin SD card unusable
• Will require card to be reformatted and data to be reinstalled
Disabling ReadyBoost
Plug a flash drive or other removable media device into your computer.
This should automatically open AutoPlay. If AutoPlay does not open, it might have been disabled. Under General
Options, click ‘Speed up my system.’ This will display the Properties dialog box for your flash drive or other
removable media device. Click the ReadyBoost tab, and then do the following:
• To turn ReadyBoost off, click ‘Do not use this device.’
• Click OK.

190-01597-00 Revision D
3.5 G3000 MODES OF OPERATION
The following section describes the various modes of operation for the G3000.
3.5.1 Normal Mode
Normal mode refers to normal operating mode. To start the G3000 system in normal mode, apply power to the
G3000 system. If the displays are already operating in configuration mode and normal mode is desired, cycle
power for the affected displays to restart in normal mode.
3.5.2 GDUs
In normal operations, PFD1 and PFD2 present graphical flight instrumentation (such as heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed) on Primary Flight Displays (PFD) in either Full Mode or Half Mode. In Full Mode, the
PFD (including its softkeys) occupies the entire display portion of the GDU. In Split Mode, the PFD is condensed
to accommodate a display pane on the outboard portion of the GDU. The reversion/dim panel, mounted in the
cockpit, controls the selection of these operating modes; refer to the AFM for detailed information about this
equipment.
MFD shows an Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) display on the left portion of the GDU.
It also shows either a single display pane in Full Mode, or two display panes side-by-side in Half Mode. The #1
and #2 Touchscreen Controllers select the Full and Half Modes for MFD.
3.5.3 Touchscreen Controllers
In normal operations, the #1 or pilot’s side Touchscreen Controller controls the PFD1 display pane (in Split
Mode), and the MFD left display pane (in Half Mode). The #2 or copilot’s Touchscreen Controller controls the
PFD2 display pane (in Split Mode) and the right display pane MFD. Either Touchscreen Controller may also
control a single MFD display pane in Full Mode. A button on the Touchscreen Controller indicates when Full
Mode or Half Mode is available for the currently selected MFD display pane. The Touchscreen Controller
joysticks select display panes for control.
Figure 3-21. G3000 Normal Operation

Revision D 190-01597-00
3.5.4 Reversionary GDU Operation
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when the LRUs are communicating using backup paths. Refer to the
Appendices for further information regarding system-specific alerts. If a GDU fails or is off-line, the system
provides the capability to show a PFD, an EICAS display, and a display pane on another GDU in Reversionary
Mode.
• PFD1 failure – MFD enters reversionary mode if Split Mode is selected for MFD on the cockpit-
mounted reversionary/dim panel, otherwise MFD continues to operate normally.
• MFD failure – PFD1 and PFD2 enter reversionary mode if Split Mode is selected for PFD1/PFD2 on
the cockpit-mounted reversionary/dim panel, otherwise PFD1 and PFD2 continue to operate
normally.
• PFD2 failure – MFD enters reversionary mode if Split Mode is selected for MFD on the cockpit-
mounted reversionary/dim panel, otherwise MFD continues to operate normally.
Figure 3-22. Reversionary Mode Operation
If MFD is operating in Reversionary Mode (e.g. PFD1 or PFD2 failure), the Touchscreen Controller on the
failed GDU side controls the Reversionary Mode display pane. If PFD1 or PFD2 is in Reversionary Mode, the
on-side Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode display pane.
If both PFD1 and PFD2 fail or are off-line, the #1 Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode
display pane on MFD. The #2 Touchscreen Controller’s functions (with the exception of display pane control)
continue to be available in the event of PFD1 and PFD2 failure.
3.5.5 Configuration Mode
Section 4 contains complete information on configuration mode.

190-01597-00 Revision D
3.5.6 'SET' AND 'ACTIVE' Commands
The SET and ACTIVE commands which are displayed on various configuration pages (Figure 3-15) are used for
setting system input/output conditions.
Figure 3-23. SET and ACTIVE Softkeys and Columns
3.5.7 SET and ACTIVE Softkeys

Look for inequalities (configuration mismatches) between the SET and ACTIVE columns during troubleshooting.
Certain problems can be resolved by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey which reloads settings to the specific LRU
(this can also be accomplished by reloading the configuration files for the LRU using the system software loader
card). Use the ACTV>SET softkey with care. If an improperly configured unit is installed, this softkey causes the
wrong configuration to replace the correct one.
Definitions:
SET—refers to a setting or group of settings that reside in the PFDs internal memory and/or master configuration
module.
ACTIVE—refers to a current setting stored and used in a LRU. LRUs store the ‘active’ settings within internal
memory.
Data can be manually copied from one column to the other by using the following two softkeys:
SET>ACTV (Set to Active) — sends the information in the SET column (data stored in the master configuration
module) to the ACTV column (data used by the LRU).
ACTV>SET (Active to Set)—copies the current settings of the LRU to the master configuration module as SET
items.

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 4―TROUBLESHOOTING
This section contains system-level troubleshooting information involving one or more of the following methods:
 Visual Hardware Inspection
 Red/Yellow X Display Indications
 G3000 System Messages
 Data Logging and Diagnostics (CMC)
 GIA And GDU Serial Configuration Page Data Path Indications
 Configuration Pages
 Common G3000 Issues And Recommended Actions
 Autopilot Troubleshooting
 Assert (Diagnostic) Log
 LRU External Connector Information
NOTE
The following table shows the various types of data status indications and their definitions. These
indications are referred to throughout this troubleshooting section and may help troubleshoot a
fault.
The LRU is online and reports that the item located next to the indicator box is
communicating.
The LRU is online, and reports that the item located next to the indicator box is not
communicating.
Same as red x (display indications only; does not appear on any configuration page).
The LRU is not reporting a status for the item located next to the indicator box. This may
be because the data is not available, not applicable, or not expected.
The LRU is not reporting status for the item located next to the indicator box. This may be
? due to the fact that the data is not available or is not expected.
“True” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have met in order to activate the item.
T
“False” condition; i.e., necessary conditions have not been met in order to activate the item.
F
“High” condition; i.e., the system expects a high voltage or a high resistance input to
H trigger the item (fan operation, etc.).
“Low” condition; i.e., the system expects a low voltage or a low resistance input to trigger
L the item (fan operation, etc.).

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.1 VISUAL HARDWARE INSPECTION
Begin troubleshooting with a visual inspection. Check for corrosion, damage, or other defects. Replace any
damaged parts as required. Inspection may require the temporary removal of an LRU to gain access to
connectors. Follow the instructions given in Section 5 for LRU removal and replacement.
4.2 RED (OR YELLOW) X DISPLAY INDICATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the failure
(Figure 4-1). Depending on the LRU, the ‘X’ may be yellow or red. The following section describes various
red/yellow x’s, their associated LRU(s), and recommended actions to take.
NOTE
During the time the G3000 is powering up, certain windows remain invalid as the equipment
begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any
window continues to be flagged, begin troubleshooting.
NAV1 or COM1 Red X
NAV1-PFD COM1-PFD
COM1-GTC 570
Associated LRU: GIA1
Recommended Troubleshooting Actions:
1. Check the GTC and the PFD for GIA1 configuration, software or failed data path error messages. Correct
any errors before proceeding.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 and reconfigure for their new positions to verify location of problem. If problem
follows GIA1, replace GIA1.
3. Check Ethernet interconnect from GIA1 to PFD and unit connector pins for faults.
4. If problem persists, replace PFD.

Revision D 190-01597-00
NAV2 or COM2 Red X
NAV2-PFD COM2-PFD
COM2-GTC 570
Associated LRU: GIA2
1. Check the GTC and the PFD for GIA2 configuration, software or failed data path error messages. Correct
any errors before proceeding.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 and reconfigure for their new positions to verify location of problem. If problem
follows GIA2, replace GIA2.
3. Check Ethernet interconnect from GIA2 to PFD and unit connector pins for faults.
4. If problem persists, replace PFD.
No GPS Position/Time/GPS Integ Red X
Associated LRU: GIA1 or 2

1. Check the GTC and the PFD for GIA1/2 configuration, software or failed data path error messages.
Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Verify the aircraft is located where the GPS antennas have a clear view of the sky.
3. Check for possible external interference to the GPS receivers.
4. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone technology is not turned on (even in a monitoring
state) in the cabin.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5. Check the GPS strength bars on both GPS receivers on the GPS 1 or GPS 2 STATUS Display on the
MFD and the GPS Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. If the signal strength levels are erratic,
disappear and reappear rapidly, or switch between a solid and hollow bar frequently there is an external
device interfering with the GPS receivers. Turn off any devices that radiate a signal in the local area or
move the aircraft to another location to remove the interference.
6. Verify the aircraft is not parked in close proximity to a hanger with the doors open and equipped with a
GPS repeater.
7. Verify the GIA’s are online by checking for a green check mark next to the GIA on the GTC avionics
status page.
8. If a GIA is not online (a red-x will be present instead of a green check mark), check for power input
faults.
9. Refer to the GIA GPS troubleshooting section for additional actions.
XPDR Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GTX

1. Check the PFD and the GTC for GIA1/2 and GTX configuration, software or failed data path error
messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
2. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the GTX Transponder Configuration page for each installed
GTX.
3. Verify the aircraft registration is entered for the transponders on the GTX Transponder Configuration
page.
4. Check the GIA and GTX racks for connector pin faults (push-back or bent) on the RS-232 interconnect
lines.
5. Replace the GTX.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Airspeed, Altitude, ISA, and Vertical Speed Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GDC

1. Check the GTC and the PFD for PFD, MFD or GDC configuration, software or failed data path error
2. Verify the GDC’s are online by checking for a green checkmark next to the GDC on the GTC avionics
status page.
3. If the GDC is not online (a red-x will be present instead of a green check mark), check for wiring/power
faults and GDC connector security.
4. Replace the GDC.
5. Inspect GDC pitot/static ports and plumbing for blockage.
6. Replace the GDC configuration module.
7. For TAS failure only, replace the GTP.
OAT Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GTP

1. Check OAT probe wiring, temperature probe source, and connectors for faults or damage.
2. Replace the GTP .
190-01597-00 Revision D
3. Replace GDC Config Module and pigtail.
4. If problem remains. replace GDC.
Attitude Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GRS

2. Check PFD and GTC for PFD, MFD or GRS configuration, software or failed data path error messages.
3. For an attitude failure while parked, check the following:
4. Is the aircraft stationary if GPS is not available? Aircraft movement (rocking the wings or moving the
tail) may cause the attitude and heading to fail if it believes the aircraft is in motion without GPS input.
5. Check if the GPS has acquired at least four satellites, has a 3D navigation solution, and a DOP of less
than 5.0.
6. Check for metal objects (tool boxes, power carts, nearby large steel structures, etc.) around the aircraft
that could be interfering with the magnetometer.
7. Cycle GRS power to restart initialization.
8. Check the GRS connecter for security and that proper wire harness strain relief is provided.
9. Check the GRS is fastened down tightly in its mounting rack and that the mounting rack is not loose
(CAUTION - do not loosen the mounting rack hardware to the airframe shelf or the aircraft will need to
be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL OFFSET procedure performed).
10. Perform an Engine Run-Up Test to check if engine vibration is causing the GRS to go offline.
11. Replace GRS.
12. If problem persists replace the GRS configuration module.
13. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support if condition continues after replacing the GRS and config
module for additional assistance.

Revision D 190-01597-00
HDG Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GRS/GMU

1. Check PFD and GTC for PFD1, MFD, GMU or GRS configuration, software or failed data path error
2. Ensure metal objects (tool boxes, power carts, etc.) are not interfering with the magnetometer and aircraft
is not in hangar, near other buildings, parked over metal drainage culverts or on hard surfaces that may
contain steel reinforcements
4. Cycle power after moving aircraft away from metal objects to determine if metal objects were the source
of the interference. Allow up to five minutes for the heading to reinitialize.
5. Perform a Magnetometer Interference Test to check for interference from onboard electrical system
components (e.g. NAV lights). Pay particular attention to any new electrical devices that have been
installed since the aircraft was new. Correct any discrepancies that do not allow this test to pass before
continuing.
6. Ensure GRS and GMU connectors are secure.
7. Check the wiring and any inline connectors between the GRS and GMU for faults.
8. Recalibrate the GMU.
9. Replace the GMU. If problem persists, replace the GRS.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Engine/Airframe Fail Red X
Associated LRU: GEA/GIA

1. Check GTC and PFD for GIA1/2 or GEA1/2 configuration, software or failed data path error messages.
2. On the PFD in Configuration Mode, turn to the GEA STATUS page and verify that the GEA internal
power supply, configuration, and calibration status boxes are green checks.
3. If the internal power supply box is a red x, check for shorted sensors that receive 5V, 10V or 12V power
from the GEA.
4. Configuration and calibration boxes should be green checks. If the calibration status boxes have red x’s,
replace the GEA.
5. Verify internal, external, and reference voltages listed in the Main Analog and I/O A Analog boxes are
not dashed out (does not include Aircraft Power 1 and 2). If any voltages are dashed out, replace the
GEA.
6. Check the GTC avionics status page to verify GEA is online (green checkmark on the AUX – SYSTEM
STATUS page is present). If GEA is not online (red-x is present), verify the unit is receiving power at the
GEA rack connector.
7. Replace the GEA.
8. If problem persists, check the GIA/GEA interconnect wiring and unit connector pins for faults.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Calibrate AHRS/MAG Annunciation
Associated LRU: GRS Configuration Module

 This annunciation is displayed if the AHRS/MAG system has been replaced and has not been calibrated.
It also is displayed if there are problems with the GRS Config Module and/or associated wiring.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.3 G3000 SYSTEM MESSAGES
In the normal mode of operation the G3000 displays a variety of system messages which will alert the technician
to a problem. System messages are displayed on the GTC notifications page (Figure 4-2) and are viewed by
pressing the MSG softkey. The G3000 displays other messages, alerts, and annunciations which are pilot related.
These are described in detail in the Garmin G3000 Pilot’s Guide for the applicable aircraft model.
Figure 4-2. G3000 System Messages

The following describes messages pertinent to maintenance, their causes and recommended actions to take. The
messages are in LRU alphabetical order.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.3.1 GCU PFD Controller System Messages
GCU1 CONFIG – GCU1 config error. Config service req’d. GCU #1 configuration settings do not match those
of backup configuration memory.
• Reload config files from a loader card.
• If problem persists, replace master configuration module, check config module harness for faults and
replace if necessary.
GCU2 CONFIG – GCU2 config error. Config service req’d. GCU #2 configuration settings do not match those
of backup configuration memory.
• Reload config files from a loader card.
• If problem persists, replace master configuration module, check config module harness for faults and
GCU1 FAIL – GCU1 is inoperative. The #1 GCU has failed.
• Replace GCU1.
GCU2 FAIL – GCU2 is inoperative. The #2 GCU has failed.
• Replace GCU2.
GCU1 KEYSTK – GCU1 [key name] key is stuck. A key is stuck on the #1 GCU bezel.
• Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several times.
GCU2 KEYSTK – GCU2 [key name] key is stuck. A key is stuck on the #2 GCU bezel.
• Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several times.
GCU1 MANIFEST – GCU1 software mismatch, communication halted. The #1 GCU has incorrect software
installed.
• Install correct software.
GCU2 MANIFEST – GCU2 software mismatch, communication halted. The #2 GCU has incorrect software
installed.
4.3.2 GDC Air Data Computer System Messages
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error correction is unavailable. GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error
correction is unavailable.
• Load correct software.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error correction is unavailable. GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error correction is unavailable. GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error correction is unavailable. GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software mismatch, communication halted. The GDC has incorrect software
installed.

190-01597-00 Revision D
GDC2 MANIFEST – GDC2 software mismatch, communication halted. The GDC has incorrect software
installed.
ADC1 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service. Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the #1 GDC
and/or #2 GDC2.
• Replace GDC1 or GDC2.
ADC2 SERVICE – ADC2 needs service. Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the #1 GDC
and/or #2 GDC2.
• Replace GDC1 or GDC2.
4.3.3 GDL System Messages
GDL CONFIG – GDL config error. Config service req’d. GDL configuration settings do not match those of
backup configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
• Ensure GDL configuration option has been loaded.
GDL FAIL – GDL has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
• Replace GDL.
GDL SERVICE – GDL needs service. Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GDL. The
system should be serviced.
• Replace GDL.
GDL RTR FAIL – The GDL router has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL router. The system should
be serviced.
• Replace router.
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, communication halted.
The GDL has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
REGISTER GFDS – Data services are inoperative, register w/GFDS. The GDL is not registered with Garmin
Flight Data Services, or its current registration data has failed authentication.
1. Check power wiring and pin out of GDL unit.
2. Verify that a Wi-Fi network is configured and available.
3. Replace GDL.
4. Activate Garmin Flight Data Services. A replacement GDL unit must be registered again even if the
system already shows REGISTERED.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.3.4 GDR System Messages
CPDLC – CPDLC connection lost. Data link connection has been lost.
• Establish new connection.
CPDLC – CPDLC facility logon failed. Logon failed.
• Check pertinent entries for accuracy.
CPDLC – CPDLC data link available. Logon is still required. The data link is ready for use, but logon to the
facility has not yet taken place.
• Logon.
GDR TEMP – GDR over temp. Reducing transmitter power. The system has detected an over temperature
condition in the GDR. The transmitter operates at reduced power.
• If the problem persists, replace the GDR.
GDR FAIL – GDR is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GDR.
• Replace the GDR.
GDR TX FAIL – GDR transmitter is inoperative.
GDR PTT – GDR push-to-talk key is stuck. The GDR push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”)
position.
1. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
2. If the problem persists, replace the GDR.
GDR RMT XFR – GDR remote transfer key is stuck. The GDR transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) position.
1. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation.
2. If the problem persists, replace the GDR.
GDR SERVICE – GDR needs service.
GDR CONFIG – GDR config error. Config service req’d. GDR configuration settings do not match those of
backup configuration memory.
GDR MANIFEST – GDR software mismatch, communication halted. The GDR has incorrect software installed.
1. Install the correct software.
2. If problem persists, replace the GDR.
GDR AUX MANIFEST – GDR AUX software mismatch, communication halted. The GDR secondary processor
has incorrect software installed.
1. Install the correct software.
2. If problem persists, replace the GDR.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.3.5 GDU System Messages
PFD1 SERVICE-The G3000 has determined PFD1 needs service.
1. Ensure PFD1 connector is fully seated and locked.
2. If the unit was started in a very dark environment the photocells may not have enough light to initially
raise the CCFT level. Go to the GDU STATUS page in configuration mode and ensure CCFT CRNT 1
and 2 levels are above 50.
3. Apply light to the photocell and observe if the CCFT level rises if the CCFT levels are not above 50.
4. Disregard the message if the CCFT level rises.
5. Replace the PFD if the CCFT level does not rise.
6. Replace PFD1.
PFD2 SERVICE-the G3000 has determined PFD2 needs service.
1. Ensure PFD2 connector is fully seated and locked.
5. Replace the PFD if the CCFT level does not rise.
6. Replace PFD2.
MFD SERVICE-the G3000 has determined the MFD needs service.
1. Ensure MFD connector is fully seated and locked.
5. Replace the MFD if the CCFT level does not rise.
6. Replace the MFD.
XTALK ERROR-a flight display crosstalk error has occurred. The MFD and PFD are not communicating with
each other.
1. Check the PFD1 ALERTS window for database error messages. Correct all errors before proceeding.
2. Check display Ethernet interconnect wiring.
3. Replace PFD1 with a known good unit to verify location of problem.
4. If problem persists, reinstall original PFD1 and replace PFD2.
5. If problem persists, reinstall PFD2 and replace MFD.
PFD1 MANIFEST – PFD1 software mismatch, communication halted. PFD1 has incorrect software installed.
• Load correct software version.
PFD2 MANIFEST – PFD 2 software mismatch, communication halted. PFD2 has incorrect software installed.
Revision D 190-01597-00
MFD1 MANIFEST – MFD 1 software mismatch, communication halted. The system has detected an incorrect
software version loaded in MFD.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error. Configuration service required. The PFD configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory.
NOTE
The various optional features need to be reinstalled if the master configuration module is
changed. The G3000 system ID number will change to a new number when installing a new
master config module.
1. Reload PFD1 configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list PFD1 on the
system upload page.
2. Reload unlock cards.
3. Reload system configuration files into the configuration module by pressing the UPDT CFG softkey on
the SYSTEM UPLOAD PAGE.
4. Check PFD1 configuration module wiring for faults and replace if necessary if message persists.
5. Replace PFD1 master configuration module and/or PFD1 if problem continues.
PFD2 CONFIG – PFD2 config error. Configuration service required. The PFD configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory.
NOTE
The various optional features will need to be reinstalled if the master configuration module is
changed. The G3000 System ID number will change to a new number when installing a new
1. Reload PFD2 configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list PFD2 on the
system upload page.
4. Check PFD2 configuration module wiring for faults and replace if necessary if message persists.
5. Replace PFD2 master configuration module and/or PFD2 if problem continues.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error. Config service req’d. The MFD configuration settings do not match
NOTE
1. Reload MFD configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list MFD on the
system upload page.
4. Check MFD configuration module wiring for faults and replace if necessary if message persists.
5. Replace MFD master configuration module and/or MFD if problem continues.
190-01597-00 Revision D
SW MISMATCH – GDU software version mismatch. Xtalk is off. The MFD and PFD have different software
versions installed.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage. The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is
reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
1. Check the cooling fan wiring.
2. Replace the display if the problem persists.
PFD2 COOLING – PFD2 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage. The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage. The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is
2. Replace the MFD if the problem persists.
PFD1 FAN FAIL – PFD1 internal fan failure. The PFD and/or MFD internal cooling fan has failed.
• Replace the PFD.
PFD2 FAN FAIL – PFD2 internal fan failure. The PFD and/or MFD internal cooling fan has failed.
• Replace the PFD.
MFD1 FAN FAIL – MFD1 internal fan failure.
• Replace the MFD.
PFD1 BKLT CAL INV – PFD1 bklt cal lost or mismatch. The PFD and/or MFD backlight calibration cannot be
found or found or is invalid.
• Reload GDU software
• Replace GDU
PFD2 BKLT CAL INV – PFD2 bklt cal lost or mismatch. The PFD and/or MFD backlight calibration cannot be
found or found or is invalid.
• Replace GDU
MFD1 BKLT CAL INV – MFD1 bklt cal lost or mismatch.
• Replace GDU
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is stuck. A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel.
1. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several times.
2. Select the GDU test page and verify key is stuck (if key is stuck the corresponding indicator will be
green).
3. Exercise suspected stuck key and reset GDU test page to see if indicator remains green without pressing
the key.

Revision D 190-01597-00
PFD2 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] is stuck. A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel.
green).
the key.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name] is stuck.
green).
the key.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration module is inoperative. The PFD1 configuration module backup memory
has failed.
NOTE
1. Check the master configuration module connector and wiring for damage inside the GDU connector back
plate.
2. Replace the master configuration module wiring and pins.
3. Replace the master configuration module if the problem persists.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low voltage. Reducing power usage. The PFD1 voltage is low.
1. Check the input voltage to PFD1.
2. Replace PFD1 if the input voltage is correct.
PFD2 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low voltage. Reducing power usage. The PFD2 voltage is low.
1. Check the input voltage to PFD2.
2. Replace PFD2 if the input voltage is correct.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low voltage. Reducing power usage. The MFD voltage is low.
1. Check the input voltage to the MFD.
2. Replace the MFD if the input voltage is correct.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation
database.
1. Reload the aviation database into the display.
2. Verify all three displays have the same Jeppesen Nav database cycle and type.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation database error exists.

190-01597-00 Revision D
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 aviation database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap database error exists. The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap
database.
1. Confirm supplemental data card is inserted fully in the bottom slot of the display.
2. Move the data card to the top slot of the display.
3. If the error clears, the problem is with the bottom slot. Insert and remove a SD card multiple times to
clean the contacts. If the card still does not work in the bottom slot, leave the card in the top slot or
replace the display.
4. Swap with a supplemental data card from another display in the same system.
5. If problem moves to the other display, the problem is the basemap file on the card. Download a basemap
file from Garmin's website to install on the cards, or replace the supplemental data cards as a set.
6. If problem remains in the same GDU, replace that GDU. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support to see
if a basemap file may be obtained to load into the display.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 basemap database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain database error exists.

Revision D 190-01597-00
5. If problem moves to the other display, reload the database on the data card or replace the supplemental
data card. You may need to replace all data cards as a set to keep the database cycles the same and
prevent database mismatch errors.
6. If problem remains in the same GDU, replace that GDU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain database missing. The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing
on the specified LRU.
190-01597-00 Revision D
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database missing. The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain database missing. The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle database error exists. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is
missing on the specified LRU.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle database error exists. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is

Revision D 190-01597-00
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle database error exists. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle database missing. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle database missing. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is
190-01597-00 Revision D
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle database missing. The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 Safe Taxi database error exists.

Revision D 190-01597-00
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chart view database error exists.
4. Reload ChartView from Jeppesen's loader program onto the SD card.
5. Replace supplemental data card. You may need to replace all data cards as a set to keep the database
cycles the same and prevent database mismatch errors.
6. Replace MFD.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts database error exists.
4. Reload FliteCharts onto the SD card.
6. Replace MFD.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport Directory database error exists.
4. Reload Airport Directory onto the SD card.
6. Replace MFD.
GTC1 DB ERR – GTC1 database error exists. The GTC detected a failure in its internal databases.
1. Attempt to reload the databases on the PFD and MFD.
2. If problem persists, replace the MFD.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database mismatch. Xtalk is off. The PFD and MFD have different navigation
database versions or types (Americas, European, etc.) installed.

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Install correct navigation database version or type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation database mismatch. The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation
database versions or types (Americas, European, etc.) installed.
• Install correct navigation database version or type in both displays.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active navigation database updated. The standby navigation database has been copied to
the active navigation database.
• No maintenance required.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database mismatch. The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or
types installed.
• Install correct terrain database version or type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database mismatch. The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions
installed.
• Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or MFD1] Terrain awareness display unavailable. One of the terrain, airport terrain, or
obstacle databases required for TAWS in the specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
• Reload database
4.3.6 GEA System Messages
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error. Config service req’d. GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of
NOTE
Option and unlock card will need to be replaced if the master configuration module is changed.
The G3000 System ID number will change to a new number when installing a new master config
module.
1. Reload GEA Configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list GEA1-4 on the
System Upload page.
2. Replace master configuration module, check config module harness for faults and replace if necessary.
NOTE
module.
1. Reload GEA Configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list GEA 1-4 on the
system upload page.
NOTE
module.

Revision D 190-01597-00
system upload page.
NOTE
module.
system upload page.
GEA 1 MANIFEST – GEA 1 software mismatch, communication halted. GEA1 has incorrect software installed.
4.3.7 GIA System Messages
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup
configuration memory.
NOTE
module.
1. Reload GIA Configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list GIA 1 or 2 on
the system upload page.
NOTE
module.
the system upload page.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config error. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration.
NOTE
190-01597-00 Revision D
module.
1. Reload GIA audio software and configuration files.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config error. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration
NOTE
module.
1. Reload GIA audio software and configuration files.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature too low. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate
correctly.
• Allow units to warm up to operating temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over temperature. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high.
1. Check fan, wiring and air tubing for proper operation (if applicable).
2. Replace cooling fan if unable to determine if operating correctly.
3. Replace GIA1.
3. Replace GIA2.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit.
• Replace GIA1.
• Replace GIA2.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA 1 software mismatch, communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect
software installed.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA 2 software mismatch, communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect
software installed.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp. Reducing transmitter power. The system has detected an over temperature
condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The transmitter will operate at reduced power.

Revision D 190-01597-00
3. Replace GIA1.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp. Reducing transmitter power.
3. Replace GIA2.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs service. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2.
COM1 and/or COM2 may still be usable.
• Replace GIA1.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs service. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2.
COM1 and/or COM2 may still be usable.
• Replace GIA2.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in
the enable (or “pressed”) position.
2. Check push-to-talk switch(s) and wiring.
3. Check GIA1/GMA1 interconnect.
4. Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem:
5. If problem follows the unit, replace GIA1.
6. If problem persists replace GMA1.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote transfer key is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the
enabled (or “pressed”) position.
2. Press the COM1 external remote transfer switch again to cycle its operation.
3. Check COM1 remote transfer switch and wiring.
4. Switch GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote transfer key is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the
enabled (or “pressed”) position.
2. Press the COM2 external remote transfer switch again to cycle its operation.
190-01597-00 Revision D
3. Check COM2 remote transfer switch and wiring.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not available from FAF to MAP waypoints. GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to
perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck with other NAVS. Loss of GPS integrity monitoring.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation. Insufficient satellites. Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient
satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation. Position error. Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS navigation. GPS fail. Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
1. Verify the area the aircraft was traveling through did not have loss of GPS coverage.
FAA NOTAMs may be issued for periods of outages, or the US Coast Guard website
http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/gps/gpsnotices/default.htm will have notices posted.
2. Using the MFD AUX - GPS status page, verify the signal strength bars are not erratic. If so, this indicates
outside interference is affecting the GPS receivers. Find and remove the source of interference (i.e. cell
phones, FBO datalink antennas, etc.).
3. Check GPS antenna and cabling.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation. Abort approach. Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
TRUE APR – True north approach. Change HDG reference to true. Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a
true north approach when the nav angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver
is unavailable.
3. If problem does not follow the unit, check GPS1 antenna and cabling.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver
is unavailable.
3. If problem does not follow the unit, check GPS2 antenna and cabling.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The
receiver may still be available.
• Replace GIA1.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Revision D 190-01597-00
• Replace GIA2.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The
• Replace GIA1.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The
• Replace GIA2.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote transfer key is stuck. The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck
in the enabled (or “pressed”) state.
2. Check NAV1 remote transfer switch and wiring.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote transfer key is stuck. The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck
in the enabled (or “pressed”) state.
2. Check NAV2 remote transfer switch and wiring.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2.
1. Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location of problem:
2. If problem follows the unit, replace GIA.
3. If problem does not follow unit, check G/S1 antenna and cabling.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2.
1. Switch GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location of problem
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
190-01597-00 Revision D
NOTE
module.
the System Upload page.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
NOTE
module.
the System Upload page.
NOTE
module.
1. Reload GIA Audio software and configuration files.
NOTE
module.
1. Reload GIA Audio software and configuration files.
correctly.
correctly.
3. Replace GIA1.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over temperature. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high
3. Replace GIA2.
• Replace GIA1.
• Replace GIA2.
HW MISMATCH – GIA1 hardware mismatch, GIA1 communication halted. A GIA mismatch has been detected,
where only one is WAAS capable.
• Replace GIA63 with a WAAS unit.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware mismatch, GIA2 communication halted. A GIA mismatch has been detected,
where only one is WAAS capable.
• Replace GIA63 with a WAAS unit.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software mismatch, communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software
installed.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software mismatch, communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software
installed.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch, communication halted. Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain
settings are incorrect.
1. Reload correct software.
2. Adjust gain settings.
condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The transmitter operates at reduced power.
3. Replace GIA1.
condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The transmitter operates at reduced power.
3. Replace GIA2.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error. The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup
NOTE
module.
190-01597-00 Revision D
1. Reload com software and configuration files.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error. The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup
NOTE
module.
1. Reload com software and configuration files.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs service. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1
and/or COM2 may still be usable.
• Replace GIA1.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs service. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1
and/or COM2 may still be usable.
• Replace GIA2.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck with other NAVS. GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of
flight.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach downgraded. Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable. Use only
LNAV minimums.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.3.8 GMA System Messages
GMA1 FAIL - GMA 1 is inoperative. The G3000 has detected a failure in GMA1.
1. Ensure GMA1, both GIAs and all GDUs are receiving power.
2. Troubleshoot for a failed data path.
3. Replace GMA1.
GMA2 FAIL - GMA 2 is inoperative. The G3000 has detected a failure in GMA2.
1. Ensure GMA2, both GIAs and all GDUs are receiving power.
3. Replace GMA2.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error. Config service req’d. The audio panel configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the GMA options configuration page.
2. If error is still present, reload config files from a loader card.
3. If problem persists, replace master configuration module, check config module harness for faults and
GMA2 CONFIG – GMA2 config error. Config service req’d. The audio panel configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the GMA options configuration page.
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA 1 software mismatch, communication halted. The audio panel has incorrect software
installed. The system should be serviced.
GMA2 MANIFEST – GMA 2 software mismatch, communication halted. The audio panel has incorrect software
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs service. Return unit for repair. The audio panel self-test has detected a problem
in the unit. Certain audio functions may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
• Replace GMA1.

190-01597-00 Revision D
GMA2 SERVICE – GMA 2 needs service. Return unit for repair. The audio panel self-test has detected a
problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The
system should be serviced when possible.
• Replace GMA2
4.3.9 GMC System Messages
GMC CONFIG – GMC Config error. Config service req’d. Error in the configuration of the GMC.
NOTE
module.
1. Reload config files from a loader card.
GMC FAIL – GMC is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GMC. The GMC is unavailable.
• Replace GMC.
GMC MANIFEST – GMC software mismatch. Communication halted. The GMC has incorrect software
GMC KEYSTK – GMC [key name] key is stuck. A key is stuck on the GMC bezel. The system should be
serviced if the problem persists.
2. Replace the GMC if problem persists.
4.3.10 GMU System Messages
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer fault has occurred. A fault has occurred in the #1 or #2 GMU. Heading is
flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses GPS for backup mode operation.
1. Check GMU/GRS interconnect for faults.
2. Replace GMU #1.
3. If problem persists, replace GRS #1.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 magnetometer fault has occurred. A fault has occurred in the #1 or #2 GMU. Heading is
flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses GPS for backup mode operation.
1. Check GMU/GRS interconnect for faults.
2. Replace GMU #2.
3. If problem persists, replace GRS #2.
MANIFEST - GMU1 software mismatch, communication halted. The GMU has incorrect software installed.
• Reload correct software.
MANIFEST - GMU2 software mismatch, communication halted. The GMU has incorrect software installed.
• Reload correct software.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.3.11 GRS System Messages
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving airspeed. The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data
computer. The AHRS relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed.
1. Check GRS1/GDC1 interconnect.
2. Replace GDC1.
3. If problem persists, replace GRS1.
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving airspeed. The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data
computer. The AHRS relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed.
1. Check GRS2/GDC2 interconnect.
2. Replace GDC2.
3. If problem persists, replace GRS2.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup GPS source. The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS
path has failed.
2. Check GPS status for GIA 1 and 2. If one or both GPS receivers cannot acquire a position lock,
troubleshoot the GPS.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup GPS source. The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS
path has failed.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving any GPS information. The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS
information.
1. Check AFMS limitations.
4. Replace the GRS.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving any GPS information. The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS
information.
1. Check AFMS limitations.
4. Replace the GRS.

190-01597-00 Revision D
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving backup GPS information. The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS
information.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving backup GPS information. The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS
information.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS
mode.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS
mode.
3. Replace the GRS.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic model database version mismatch. The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic
model database versions do not match.
• Update magnetic field model when practical.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field model needs update. The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of
date.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magnetic-field model needs update. The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of
date.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far north/south, no magnetic compass. The aircraft is outside geographical limits for
approved AHRS operation. Heading is annunciated as invalid.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far north/south, no magnetic compass.
Revision D 190-01597-00
MANIFEST – GRS1 software mismatch, communication halted. The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed.
MANIFEST – GRS2 software mismatch, communication halted. The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed.
4.3.12 GSD System Messages
GSD1 CONFIG - GSD1 config error. Config service req'd. GSD1 and the CDU have different copies of the
GSD1 configuration.
1. Load correct software version.
2. Replace unit.
GSD2 CONFIG - GSD2 config error. Config service req'd. GSD2 and the CDU have different copies of the
GSD2 configuration.
2. Replace unit.
GSD1 COOLING - GSD1 temperature too low. GSD1 is reporting a low temperature condition.
• Allow unit to warm up.
GSD2 COOLING - GSD2 temperature too low. GSD2 is reporting a low temperature condition.
• Allow unit to warm up.
GSD1 COOLING - GSD1 over temperature. GSD1 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
Check fan, wiring and air tubing for proper operation (if applicable).
2. Replace GSD.
GSD2 COOLING - GSD2 over temperature. GSD2 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
3. Replace GSD.
GSD1 SERVICE - GSD1 needs service. Return unit for repair. GSD1 is reporting an internal error condition.
The GSD may still be usable.
2. Replace unit.
GSD2 SERVICE - GSD2 needs service. Return unit for repair. GSD2 is reporting an internal error condition.
The GSD may still be usable.
2. Replace unit.
GSD1 FAIL - GSD1 is inoperative. The system has detected a failed GSD.
2. Replace unit.
GSD2 FAIL - GSD2 is inoperative. The system has detected a failed GSD.
190-01597-00 Revision D
2. Replace unit.
MANIFEST - GSD software mismatch. Communication halted. The system has detected an incorrect software
version loaded in the GSD.
4.3.13 GSR System Messages
GSR1 FAIL - GSR1 has failed. A failure has been detected in the GSR. The transceiver is unavailable.
• Replace the GSR.
REGISTER GFDS - Data services are inoperative.
• Register w/ GFDS.
4.3.14 GTC System Messages
GTC1 CONFIG – GTC1 config error. Config service req’d. GTC configuration settings do not match those of
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the GTC configuration page.
GTC1 SERVICE – GTC1 needs service.
• Replace GTC1.
GTC2 SERVICE – GTC2 needs service.
• Replace GTC2.
GTC1 COOLING – GTC1 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage. The GTC has insufficient cooling.
3. Replace GTC1.
GTC2 COOLING – GTC2 has poor cooling. Reducing power usage. The GTC has insufficient cooling.
3. Replace GTC2.
GTC1 FAN FAIL – GTC1 internal fan failure.
• Replace GTC1 fan. Note: See Section 5.16.1 for GTC Fan replacement procedure.
GTC2 FAN FAIL – GTC2 internal fan failure.
• Replace GTC2 fan. Note: See Section 5.16.1 for GTC Fan replacement procedure.
GTC1 VOLTAGE – GTC1 has low voltage. Reducing power usage. The GTC is operating with reduced power.
1. Check input voltage to GTC1.

Revision D 190-01597-00
2. If input voltage is ok, replace GTC1.
GTC2 VOLTAGE – GTC2 has low voltage. Reducing power usage. The GTC is operating with reduced power.
1. Check input voltage to GTC2.
2. If input voltage is ok, replace GTC2.
GTC1 FAIL – GTC1 is inoperative.
• Replace GTC1.
GTC2 FAIL – GTC2 is inoperative.
• Replace GTC2.
GTC1 MANIFEST – GTC 1 software mismatch, communication halted. The GTC has incorrect software
installed.
GTC2 MANIFEST – GTC 2 software mismatch, communication halted. The GTC has incorrect software
installed.
GTC1 CARD1 ERR – GTC1 card 1 is invalid. The internal SD card in the GTC contains invalid data.
6. If problem remains in the same GTC, replace that GTC.
GTC2 CARD1 ERR – GTC2 card 1 is invalid. The internal SD card in the GTC contains invalid data.
6. If problem remains in the same GTC, replace that GTC.
GTC1 CARD1 REM – GTC1 card 1 was removed.
• Reinsert card.
GTC2 CARD1 REM – GTC2 card 1 was removed.
• Reinsert card.
190-01597-00 Revision D
GTC KEYSTK – GTC1 [key name] key is stuck. A knob or joystick is stuck on the GTC bezel.
• Attempt to free the stuck control by pushing or turning it several times.
GTC KEYSTK – GTC2 [key name] key is stuck. A knob or joystick is stuck on the GTC bezel.
• Attempt to free the stuck control by pushing or turning it several times.
4.3.15 GTS System Messages
GTS CONFIG – GTS Config error. Config service req'd. The GTS and GDU have different copies of the GTS
configuration, or the Mode S address is invalid.
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the GTS configuration page.
GTS MANIFEST – GTS software mismatch, communication halted. The GTS has incorrect software installed.
4.3.16 GTX System Messages
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error. Config service req’d. The transponder configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration memory.
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the transponder configuration page and verify the aircraft
registration is present.
XPDR2 CONFIG – XPDR2 config error. Config service req’d. The transponder configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration memory.
NOTE
module.
1. Perform a SET>ACTV configuration reset on the transponder configuration page and verify the aircraft
registration is present.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX 1 software mismatch, communication halted. The transponder has incorrect software
installed.
GTX2 MANIFEST – GTX 2 software mismatch, communication halted. The transponder has incorrect software
installed.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
• Replace XPDR1.
XPDR2 SRVC – XPDR2 needs service.
• Replace XPDR2.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative. There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
2. Check communication paths.
3. Replace GTX1.
XPDR2 FAIL – XPDR2 is inoperative. There is no communication with the #2 transponder.
2. Check communication paths.
3. Replace GTX2.
4.3.17 GWX System Messages
GWX CONFIG - GWX configuration error. Config service req'd. The G3000 has detected a GWX configuration
mismatch between the GWX and PFD1.
NOTE
module.
1. Load GWX configuration file from a G3000 software loader card.
2. Perform GWX Pitch/Roll level and calibration procedure.
3. Replace PFD1 master configuration module, check config module wiring for faults and replace if
necessary.
4. If problem persists, replace the GWX.
5. GWX FAIL - GWX is inoperative. The G3000 does not detect the presence of the GWX.
6. Check GWX unit is receiving power and ground.
7. Check GWX connector for security.
8. If the GWX communication path passes through other units to the display, check those units for proper
operation.
9. Check Ethernet connections between the GWX and display for faults.
GWX SERVICE - Needs service. Return unit for repair. The G3000 has detected the GWX is present but it is
reporting an issue.

190-01597-00 Revision D
1. Refer later in this section for troubleshooting steps.
MANIFEST - GWX software mismatch. Communication halted. The G3000 has detected an incorrect software
version in the GWX.
• Load the correct software.
'RDR FAULT' message on radar page. The G3000 has detected the GWX is present but it is reporting an issue.
1. Refer to Section 4 for troubleshooting steps.
'RADAR FAIL' message on radar page. The G3000 does not detect the presence of the GWX.
1. Check GWX unit is receiving power and ground.
2. Check GWX connector for security.
3. If the GWX communication path passes through other units to the display, check those units for proper
operation.
4. Check Ethernet connections between the GWX and display for faults.
'STAB INOP' message on radar page. Stabilization function is not available due to lack of attitude data. Caused
by "attitude fault" on GWX config page.
1. Refer to ATTITUDE fault troubleshooting section.
4.3.18 Miscellaneous System Messages
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/63W has failed.
• Troubleshoot the data path.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic variance. Verify all course angles. The GDU’s internal model cannot
determine the exact magnetic variance for geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic
course angles may differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
• No maintenance required; pilot issue.
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio source unavailable. TAWS-B is disabled because an aural alert audio
source is unavailable.
TRN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness audio config error. Service req’d. TAWS-B is disabled because the audio
configuration is invalid. The system should be serviced.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM – [PFD1 or MFD1] card 1 was removed. Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
• Reinsert card
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card. The SD card was removed from the
bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card needs to be reinserted.
• Reinsert card
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – [PDF1 or MFD1] card 1 is invalid. The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD
or MFD contains invalid data.

Revision D 190-01597-00
1. Confirm supplemental data card is inserted fully in the top slot of the display.
2. Move the data card to the bottom slot of the display.
3. If the error clears, the problem is with the top slot. Insert and remove a SD card multiple times to clean
the contacts. If the card still does not work in the top slot, leave the card in the bottom slot or replace the
display.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – [PFD1 or MFD1] Card 2 is invalid. The SD card in the bottom card slot of the
PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 3 REM – Card 3 was removed. Reinsert card. The internal SD card was removed from
the PFD or MFD. The system should be serviced.
• Reinsert card
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 3 ERR – [PDF1 or MFD1] card 3 is invalid. The internal SD card in the PFD or MFD
contains invalid data. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO MANIFEST– Audio software mismatch, communications halted. The audio system has incorrect
software installed. The system should be serviced.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.4 DATA LOGGING AND DIAGNOSTICS (CENTRAL MAINTENANCE COMPUTER
FUNCTIONALITY)
The G3000 has a maintenance mode which access the following functions:
• LRU Rigging and Calibration
• Data Logging and Diagnostics
• Return to Service
The logging and diagnostics functions are further divided into the following areas:
• Data logging
• Data storage
• Data viewing
• Data transfer
Figure 4-3 shows CMC top level functionality.
Refer to OEM aircraft documentation for information on data logging and diagnostics capability of the G3000.
Figure 4-3. Overview of Data Logging and Transfer

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.5 GIA AND GDU SERIAL CONFIGURATION PAGE DATA PATH INDICATIONS
The GIA and GDU Serial Configuration pages can be used to troubleshoot possible LRU faults by observing the
data indicators.
SELECT UNITS—MFD/PFD1/PFD2/GIA1/GIA2
ARINC 429/RS-232/RS-485 WINDOW
Data Indicator Status/Recommended Actions
 SELECT UNIT/LRU data path is functioning correctly.
1. SELECT UNIT/LRU data path is not functioning correctly.
2. Check GTC avionics status page for SELECT UNIT or LRU configuration or
software error messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
3. If applicable, check the SELECT UNIT/LRU interconnect wiring and unit
connector pins for faults.
4. Replace LRU.
5. Reload SELECT UNIT config file.
6. If problem remains, replace SELECT UNIT.
7. Remove SELECT UNIT and verify power and ground are present at the
appropriate connector.
• If power or ground is not present, troubleshoot aircraft wiring for faults.
• If power and ground are present, check the select unit and LRU connector for
damaged or pushback pins.
8. Swap PFD1 and PFD2 to confirm if the problem is in the original PFD1.
9. Replace original PFD1 if box displays green check after swapping displays.
10. Ensure LRU connecter is secure and proper wire harness strain relief is provided.
11. Swap LRU #1 and LRU #2 to confirm if the problem is in the original LRU #1.
12. Replace original LRU #1 if box displays green check after swapping units.
1. SELECT UNIT/LRU data path functionally is unknown.
2. Reload SELECT UNIT configuration file.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6 CONFIGURATION PAGES
4.6.1 General System Awareness
Configuration pages can help identify a fault by observing the values and symbology in the data fields for various
G3000 subsystems and LRUs. This section describes the configuration pages and gives a basic definition of their
various fields. Configuration data is loaded to the LRUs from an aircraft-specific Garmin software loader card.
Settings are typically are predetermined for a specific aircraft. Different security levels exist for configuration
pages. Most pages contain flight critical information and cannot be accessed using normal methods.
4.6.2 Configuration Page Security and General Information
The following levels of security apply to the configuration pages.
Access Data Security Measure
Pilot Access Pilot profiles, etc. None
Line Techs (troubleshooting) Basic configuration and Hold down <ENT> key on
statuses (non- the GDU at power- up.
catastrophic)
Line Techs (software/configuration GDL 69 antenna Hold down <ENT> key on
changes) configuration, GDL 69 the GDU at power- up,
present configuration, AND enter key sequence
Fuel, GEA, GRS, and 12,11,10,12 on System
ADC configuration and Status Page for pages.
calibration
Garmin Airframe/alert Not Field Accessible
configuration

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.3 Configuration Mode
To start the G3000 system in configuration mode (all displays), do the following:
1. Apply power to the G3000 system by applying aircraft EXT power and energizing all electrical buses.
2. Pull the PFD1, MFD, and PFD2 circuit breakers.
3. Press and hold the far right softkey on PFD2 while applying power by closing the PFD2 circuit breaker.
4. Release the softkey after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of PFD2.
5. Press and hold the far right softkey on the MFD while applying power by closing the MFD circuit
breaker.
6. Release the softkey after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of the MFD.
8. Release the ENT key after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of PFD1.
If the display(s) are already operating in normal mode and configuration mode is desired for PFD1 only, do the
following:
1. Pull the PFD1 circuit breaker.
3. Release the softkey after ‘INITIALIZING SYSTEM’ appears in the upper left corner of PFD1.
NOTE
A configuration page ceases to show (timeout) when no page navigation attempt has occurred in
five seconds.
Configuration pages are selecting by using the PFD knob on the GCU controller (Figure 4-5). To select the page
groups use the large knob, to select pages within a group, turn the small knob. Note: Configuration page
operation can also be performed using thje GCU Control Button on the GTC in configuration mode as explained
in Section 6 and other sections of the manual.
Figure 4-4. GCU Controller PFD Knob

NOTE
The configuration pages that are described in the next section are an example of what could be
installed in any given aircraft equipped with a G3000.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6.4 Configuration Page Groups and Descriptions
Figure 4-5. Configuration Pages and Page Groups
Figure 4-6. Configuration Page Title

When the associated LRUs are configured, the configuration pages are grouped and ordered according to the
following (Figure 4-5):
• SYSTEM
• GDU
• GIA
• GSD
• GEA
• GTX
• GRS
• ADC
• GFC
• GMA
• GDL
• RMT
• GWX
• GTS

Revision D 190-01597-00
The following sections describe typical configuration pages and their basic definitions.
4.6.4.1 System Group
System Status Page
NOTE: The System Status page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow softkey operations when the
boot disk is not present.
Data
The System Status page displays the following data:
• Indications that show the presence or non-presence of LRUs (green checkmark, red x). The System Status
page displays a list of LRUs that are configured. The following data is displayed for a selected LRU:
• Part Number
• Version
• Product
• Copyright
• Serial Number
• Model Number
• Functions Present
• Status

190-01597-00 Revision D
Time Configuration Page
Data
The Date/Time Setup Configuration page displays the following data:
• UTC date
• UTC time
Operations
The Date/Time Setup Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Set the system UTC date by highlighting the date field and using PFD knob entry
• Set the system UTC time by highlighting the time field and using PFD knob entry

Revision D 190-01597-00
Lighting Configuration Page
Data
The Lighting Configuration page displays the following data when a GDU is selected:
• Current GDU unit selected
• Current display and key backlight source input value
• Current display and key backlight intensity
• Automatic display and key backlight source
• Display and key backlight filter response time
• Display and key backlight filter minimum value
Note: The filter minimum value defines the minimum lighting intensity for the display and key backlight. The
filter minimum overrides the lighting curve settings when the minimum provides a greater intensity than the
lighting curve.
• Display backlight filter photocell override transition percent value (if non-photocell display source is
selected)
Note: If the display backlight input percentage is less than the photocell override percentage, the GDU uses the
photocell override curve. Otherwise, the GDU uses the lighting bus curve.
• Display backlight filter photocell vertex selected (if non-photocell display source is selected)
• GMA annunciator and key backlight intensity (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured to be
present)
• GMA annunciator and key gain (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured to be present)
• GMA annunciator and key offset (if a GMA associated with the selected GDU is configured to be present)
• Display and key curve vertices
190-01597-00 Revision D
• Display and key photo curve vertices
The Lighting Configuration page displays the following data when a remote controller is selected:
• Current remote controller unit selected
• Current annunciator and backlight source input value
• Current annunciator and backlight intensity
• Set and active automatic annunciator and backlight source
• Set and active annunciator and backlight filter response time
• Set and active annunciator and backlight filter minimum value
Note: The filter minimum value defines the minimum lighting intensity for the annunciator and backlight. The
filter minimum overrides the lighting curve settings when the minimum provides a greater intensity than the
lighting curve.
• Annunciator and backlight vertex selected
• Set and active annunciator filter photocell override transition percent value (if a non-photocell
annunciator source is selected)
Note: If the annunciator input percentage is less than the photocell override percentage, the remote controller uses
the photocell override curve. Otherwise, the remote controller uses the lighting bus curve.
• Annunciator filter photocell vertex selected (if a non-photocell annunciator source is selected)
• Set and active annunciator and backlight curve vertices
• Set and active annunciator and backlight photo curve vertices
Operations
The Main Lighting Configuration page allows the following operations when a GDU is selected for each field on
the page:
• Select GDU or remote controller unit
• Select automatic display and key backlight source (photo, 14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, 5V AC)
• Select display and key backlight filter response time (0-9)
• Select display filter minimum value (0.14 - 100)
• Select key backlight filter minimum value (0 - 100)
• Select display and key vertex for control curve editing
• Select display backlight filter photocell override percent (0 - 100)
• Select display backlight filter photocell vertex for curve editing
• Select GMA annunciator and key gain (0.00 - 2.00)
• Select GMA annunciator and key offset (-100 - +100)
• Set coordinates of currently selected curve vertex by rocking the joystick up or down
The Main Lighting Configuration page allows the following operations when a remote controller is selected:
• Select GDU or remote controller unit
• Select automatic annunciator and backlight source (photo, 14V DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, 5V AC, SERIAL)
• Select annunciator and backlight filter response time (0-9)
• Select annunciator and backlight filter minimum value (0.2 - 100)

Revision D 190-01597-00
• Select annunciator and backlight vertex for control curve editing
• Select annunciator filter photocell override percent (0 - 100)
• Select annunciator filter photocell vertex for curve editing
• Set coordinates of currently selected curve vertex by rocking the joystick up or down
• Copy the set configuration to the active configuration by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
Note: The set configuration is the configuration stored by the GDU. The active configuration is the configuration
actually being used by the remote controller. The active and set configurations may not be synchronized if a
remote is configured on a GDU and then is later connected to a different GDU.
• Copy the active configuration to the set configuration by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey

190-01597-00 Revision D
System Audio
Data
The System Audio page displays the following data:
• Audio clip name
• Audio clip volume
• Altitude alerter threshold clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Altitude alerter deviation limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Altitude alerter beyond limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
Operations
The Audio Clip Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change audio clip volume with the volume field highlighted
• Change audio alert voice type (male or female) with the voice field highlighted
• Test playback of any available audio clips via selection from the audio clip drop-down list and
highlighting the "PLAY?" or "TEST?" field and pressing ENT
• Stop playback of any available audio clips via highlighting the "STOP?" field and pressing ENT
• Change altitude alerter threshold clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Change altitude alerter deviation limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)
• Change altitude alerter beyond limit clip (tone 1, tone 2, off)

Revision D 190-01597-00
System Upload Page
Data
The System Upload Configuration page displays the following data:
• Group List
• Item List
• Product List
The System Upload page compares the software part numbers on the loader card and in the LRU and performs the
following operations:
• Inhibit both software and configuration upload by denoting "N/A" on both fields if the part numbers are
mismatched
• Allow software and configuration (if available) upload with checkbox(es) if the part numbers are
matching
• Display the product in the product list and allow software and configuration (if available) upload with
checkbox(es) if the reported serial number is less than or equal to the specified maximum and greater than
or equal to the specified minimum
• Display the product in the product list but mark the software and configuration fields with the text "INV",
displayed in yellow, if the serial number is not being reported by the LRU
Configuration Items
The System Upload page supports the configuration of the following products:
• Airframe
• System
• MFD 1
• PFD 1
• PFD 2

190-01597-00 Revision D
• GIA 1
• GIA 2
• Pilot GMA
• Co-pilot GMA
• GTX 1
• GTX 2
• GEA 1
• GEA 2
• GEA 3
• Pilot GDC
• Copilot GDC
• GDL
• GWX
• GCU
• GMC
• Audio
• GSD 1
• GSD 2
• GDL
• GTS
• COM 1
• COM 2
• Digital GMA 1
• Digital GMA 2
Commands
The System Upload page supports the following commands:
• Clear Configuration
• The Clear Configuration command supports the following options:
• Clear all configuration data
• Clear airframe configuration data
• Clear configuration data for airframe alerts and triggers
• Clear configuration data for CMC alerts and triggers
Summary
• A list of attempted uploads and their result in the Summary window
• A visual result next to an item's checkbox (could be both software and configuration) with a result of
PASS (in green text) or FAIL (in red text)

Revision D 190-01597-00
• If serial number checking is enabled for a product and a serial number is not being reported by the LRU,
an attempt to load the product fails immediately and display the text "NO SERIAL REPORTED" in the
Summary window
Status
• The upload status is displayed using the progress pop-up window
Configuration ID
• The configuration ID is displayed in the upper left corner
• The configuration ID is updated after a load configuration or a clear configuration operation is completed.
Operations
The System Upload Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Selecting an airframe and configuration/software to load
• Checking or unchecking a checkbox which determines if the page will attempt to load that particular
• product's software/configuration by highlighting the software/configuration checkbox for a product and
pressing ENT
• Starting an upload by pressing the LOAD softkey
• Canceling an upload by pressing the CANCEL softkey
• Using the SMRY UP and SMRY DN softkeys to scroll through the summary window
• Updating the configuration backup module with the internal configuration values using the UPDT CFG
Softkey
• When an unlock card is inserted, CLR CFG softkey is displayed on tier #1
• Accessing tier #2 softkeys when CLR CFG softkey is pressed
• Clear all configuration data when CLR ALL softkey is pressed
• Clear airframe configuration data when CLR AFRM softkey is pressed
• Clear configuration data for airframe alerts and triggers when CLR CAS softkey is pressed
• Clear configuration data for CMC alerts and triggers when CLR CMC softkey is pressed

190-01597-00 Revision D
Aircraft Configuration Page
LRU Configuration Status

A green checkbox indicates that the unit is properly configured and is communicating normally. A yellow
question mark symbol indicates that the unit configuration is invalid. A red X indicates or that the unit is not
communicating properly.
Aircraft Configuration
• Aircraft Registration: Enter the aircraft’s tail number here.
• ICAO Address: Enter the aircraft’s 24 bit ICAO address here.
• IATA Airline Designator: If applicable, enter the airline’s 2 digit airline designator code.
• Country Code: Not used at this time.
• VFR Code: A pre-programmed code which will become active when the VFR key on the GDU is pressed.
Pressing the VFR key again restores the previous code.

Revision D 190-01597-00
File Manager Page
NOTE: The File Manager page is protected by a boot disk. The page is hidden when the boot disk is not present.
Data
The File Manager Configuration page displays the following data:
• The current device
• The current directory that is being viewed
• A list of files and sub-directories in the current directory that shows the mode, name, size, and date
modified
Operations
The File Manager Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change the current directory that is being viewed by pressing ENT with a directory highlighted
• Copy the highlighted file to another directory via the COPY and PASTE softkeys
• Copy the highlighted directory to another directory via the COPY and PASTE softkeys
• Clear the highlighted file if the file is permitted to be cleared via the CLEAR softkey
• Delete the highlighted file if the file is permitted to be deleted via the DELETE softkey
• Delete the highlighted directory if the directory is empty and permitted to be deleted via the DELETE
softkey
• Clear the highlighted directory of all subdirectories and files if the directory is permitted to be cleared via
the CLEAR softkey

190-01597-00 Revision D
Diagnostics Terminal Page
The Diagnostics Terminal page is only be available in Diagnostics Mode.

Data
The Diagnostics Terminal page displays the following data:
• Currently selected LRU
• Currently selected command
• Output data received from the selected LRU
Operations
• The Diagnostics Terminal page allows the following operations for each field on the page:
• Selecting an LRU to review from the list by highlighting the LRU field or selecting the "Select LRU
Window" menu option
• Changing the command to execute by highlighting the Command field or selecting the "Select Command
Window" menu option
• Executing the selected command by pressing ENT once the command has been entered
• Scrolling through the output from the selected LRU by pressing the OUTPUT softkey or selecting the
"Select Output Window" menu option, then turning the FMS inner knob.
• Freeze the output of the selected LRU by pressing the FREEZE softkey or selecting the "Freeze
Diagnostics Data" menu option.
• Clear the output data received thus far by pressing the CLEAR softkey or selecting the "Clear Diagnostics
Data" menu option.
• Copy the output data received to the card by pressing the CP2CRD softkey or selecting the "Copy
Diagnostics Data to Card" menu option.
• Log the data to the card by pressing the LG2CRD softkey or by selecting the "Start Log Diagnostics to
Card" menu option.
Revision D 190-01597-00
• Move the highlight to the LRU selection field by pressing the LRU softkey.
• Move the highlight to the command entry field by pressing the COMMAND softkey.
• Move the highlight to the output window by pressing the OUTPUT softkey.

190-01597-00 Revision D
OEM Diagnostics Page
The OEM Diagnostics page is available and displays diagnostics data when all of the conditions in either of the
following cases are met:
• The LRU is in configuration mode
• An HTML diagnostics card is inserted
• The LRU is in normal mode
• The LRU is an MFD
• An HTML diagnostics card is inserted
• The MFD is not in a reversionary state
• The airframe is on ground in maintenance mode
The OEM Diagnostics page is available when the LRU is in configuration mode, regardless of LRU type, but only
display diagnostics data if an HTML diagnostics card is inserted.
Data
The OEM Diagnostics page displays the following data:
• Contents of index.htm file located in "html" directory on card (html\index.htm).
Operations
The OEM Diagnostics page allows the following operations:
• Capture screen image to the "print" directory on the card by pressing the SAVE IMG softkey or selecting
the "Save Image" menu option.
• Traversing fields defined by data on the card using the FMS knob.
• Selecting items using the ENT key.

Revision D 190-01597-00
System Configuration Page
NOTE: The System Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page allows only GDL present to be
configured without a boot disk present.
Data
• Indicates the presence (green check mark) or non-presence (red x) of LRUs.

190-01597-00 Revision D
System Data Path Configuration Page
The System Data Paths Configuration page displays the following data when the A429, CAN, RS-232, or RS-485
data path softkey is selected.
A table containing one row for each configured LRU with the following data per row, ordered from left to
right:
• A text field indicating the LRU name in the column
• A text field indicating the channel name
A status indicator showing:
• An N/A indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "N/A"
• A positive indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "OK"
• A negative indication if the monitor is on and data path status is "FAIL"
• An unknown indication if the monitor is off or the monitor is "ON" and data path status is
"UNKNOWN"
A text field indicating the port monitor status:
• "ON" if the monitor is turned on
• "OFF" if the monitor is turned off
A text field indicating the port status with the following possible values:
• "OK" if the port is communicating
• "FAIL" if the port is not communicating
• "N/A" if the port is not applicable
• "UNKNOWN" if the port status is unknown

Revision D 190-01597-00
Data
The System Data Paths Configuration page displays the following data when the HSDB data path softkey is
selected.
A table containing one row for each configured LRU with the following data per row, ordered from left to right:
• A text field indicating the LRU name in the column
• A drop down selectable field indicating the expected LRU for each HSDB port
• A white text field indicating the current LRU for each HSDB port
A status indicator for each HSDB port:
• An N/A indicator if the expected LRU is configured to none and there is no actual LRU online
• A positive indicator if the expected LRU matches actual LRU online
• A negative indicator if the expected LRU does not match actual LRU online
Operations
The System Data Path Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Turn on/off port monitor on A429, CAN, RS-232, or RS485 page
• Configure port on HSDB page
• Display ARINC-429 port monitoring information by pressing the A429 softkey
• Display CAN port monitoring information by pressing the CAN softkey
• Display HSDB path monitoring information by pressing the HSDB softkey
• Display RS-232 port monitoring information by pressing the RS-232 softkey
• Display RS-485 port monitoring information by pressing the RS-485 softkey

190-01597-00 Revision D
System Setup Page
In addition to the field definitions that are described in the Pilot’s Guide, the following additional fields exist:
Fuel Type
• Displays the currently configured system fuel type.
• Allows the user to set the currently configured fuel type for the system, which will result in the
configuration for the GDU, GIA 1, GIA 2, GSD 1, and GSD 2 to be set to the selected fuel type, by
highlighting the currently allowed system fuel type setting.
Flight Director
• Displays the currently allowed system flight director setting(s).
• Allows the user to set the currently allowed system flight director setting(s) by highlighting the currently
allowed system flight director setting and turning the small GCU PFD Knob if more than one flight
director option is allowed per the airframe specific requirements document.
GFDS Data Request
The GFDS Data Request section of the System Setup page is only be available when GFDS Weather is
configured. The GFDS Data Request Section displays the following data:
• Fastest Update Rate
Operations
• The user is able to set the Fastest Update Rate by highlighting the current setting using the large GCU
PFD knob and using the small GCU PFD Knob to select from the following list (Default, 5 Min, 10 Min,
15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, 60 Min).
• Pilot profile data and operations is not available on the configuration mode System Setup page.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Manifest Configuration Page
The Manifest Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot
disk is not present.
Data
• Software Card
• Part number
• Version number
• LRUs
• Part number
• Version number
Operations
• Changing an LRU part number
• Changing an LRU version number

190-01597-00 Revision D
Maintenance Log Page
Data
The Maintenance Log Configuration Page displays a list of log entries with the following information for each
entry:
• Entry alert ID
• Date & Time
• Set or Clear
• Inhibit state
The Maintenance Log Configuration page displays the log data points for the selected log entry.
Operations
The Maintenance Log Configuration Page allows the following operations:
• Clear the maintenance log by pressing the CLEAR softkey and then confirming a popup dialog.
• Save the maintenance log to an SD card by pressing the CP2CRD softkey
• Select log section to view by pressing the SECTION softkey and the subsequent number softkeys

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.2 GDU Page Group
GDU Serial Configuration Page
Data
The GDU RS-232/ARINC 429 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GDU unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• ARINC 429 SDI
• Set and active inputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Set and active outputs for RS-232 channels 1 and 2
• Port status indication for each ARINC 429 input
• Port status indication for each RS-232 input
Operations
The GDU RS-232/ARINC 429 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GDU unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• Select set data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 and 2
• Select ARINC 429 SDI
• Select set input for RS-232 channels 1 through 2
• Select set output for RS-232 channels 1 through 2

190-01597-00 Revision D
GDU Status Page
Data
'STATUS' Window:
• RAM―Indicates condition of GDU 104X RAM memory. If it does not pass, the unit may not initialize.
• XILINX―Indicates condition of GDU 104X XILINX processor. If it does not pass, the unit may not
initialize.
• BASE MAP―Indicates condition of stored basemap in the GDU 104X. A green box indicates the
basemap has been installed. If the box is black, the basemap will need to be loaded. Contact Garmin for
assistance.
• ETHERNET 1, 2, 3―Indicates status of the GDU 104Xs Ethernet channel. A green box indicates the
ETHERNET loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is
present.
• RS-232 1, 2―Indicates status of the GDU 104X’s RS-232 channel. A green box indicates the RS-232
loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is present.
• IRDA―Indicates status of GDU 104X IrDA infrared port. Used for Garmin testing, it is not activated at
this time
• ETHERNET 4―Indicates status of GDU 104Xs Ethernet channel 5. Used for Garmin testing, it is not
activated at this time

Revision D 190-01597-00
'ANALOG' Window:
• PHOTOCELL A, B: Displays the input value of display photocells, between 0 and 9999. The values can
be converted to a percentage by adding a decimal place two digits over from the right (example: 8035 =
80.35%). If there is a significant split (~30% to 50%) you can expect the display to appear different from
the other display in the aircraft, IF both of their lighting curves are set to the same values. Replace the
display if one photocell reading is significantly different from the other.
• BEZEL THERM―Displays the temperature of the GDU bezel, expressed in degrees Celsius (Example:
2064 = 20.64 degrees Celsius)
• CCFT CRNT 1, 2―Displays an indication of current flowing through the display backlight bulbs.
Number does not reflect actual current value and is not useful for troubleshooting.
• LGHT BUS AC―Displays the input value of the AC lighting bus, if enabled. Disregard number if it is
not used in the installation.
• LGHT BUS DC―Displays the input value of the DC lighting bus, if enabled. Disregard number if not
used in the installation.
• POWER (1.3V, 2.5V, 3.3V, 28 V 1/2)―Displays power input voltages of various internal components.
Should be within 10% of the desired voltage. (example: for 2.5V field, 2500 = 2.500 Vdc; for 28V Field,
3633 = 36.33 Vdc). Replace the display if these values are more than 10% from the desired voltage.
• INTRNL TEMP 1, 2―Displays the internal temperature sensor values of the display, in degrees Celsius.
(Example: 45267 = 45.267°C)
'DISCRETE' Window:
GDU System ID 1 GDU System ID 2 GDU System ID 3 Display Mode
Black Black Green MFD
Black Black Black PFD #1
Green Black Black PFD #2
• SYS ID 1, 2, 3―Displays the current system ID assigned to the display. Green indicates that the System
ID pin is strapped to ground. Black indicates that the System ID pin is left ‘open’ and not strapped to
ground.
• RVRSNRY MODE 1, 2―Displays the current status of the reversionary modes. Reversionary Mode 1 is
activated by the GMA 1347 reversion button. Reversionary Mode 2 is activated by a second GMA 1347,
if installed. Reversionary 1 input is a ground on Pin 58, reversionary 2 input is a ground on Pin 15.
• SPARE INPUT―A green box indicates Pin 14 is grounded. This input should have a black box, if it is
green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• TEST/DEMO MODE SLCT―A green box indicates Pin 53/54 is grounded. These inputs should have a
black box, if either box is green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• PULSE PER SEC 1, 2―Displays status of GPS time synchronization inputs (from GIA) to the GDU.
Used for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
The ‘Discrete' Window displays the current configuration of discrete inputs into the display. These settings are
loaded with the G3000 Loader Card and must not be changed. The input box is green if it is receiving the input,
black if no input is expected, or red for a missing input. If the active column does not match the set column, load
PFD/MFD configuration files. These settings are loaded with the G3000 Loader Card and must not be changed.

190-01597-00 Revision D
GDU Key Test Page
The GDU key Test Page shows a graphical layout of all display buttons in red. Each red button turns green when
the button is pressed indicating correct operation of the button.
GDU Test Page Window Descriptions
'DISPLAY-NEC®' Window:
• DUTY PWM 1―Displays the display brightness duty pulse width modulation. Value range is between 0
and 9999 and corresponds to the display brightness value shown. Not useful for troubleshooting.
• CRNT PWM―Displays percentage of current pulse-width-modulation to backlight bulbs. Value is
between 0 and 10,000, showing the percentage of the maximum allowable current to the backlight. Not
useful for troubleshooting.
• TOGGLE PWM TO MANL?― Allows the technician to manually adjust the display brightness.
• TOGGLE CCFT OFF?― Allows the technician to turn off the backlight current controller.
• 'KEY' Window:
• KEY PWM―Displays the keypad pulse width modulation brightness value. Range is between 0 and
9999 and corresponds to the keypad brightness value shown. Not useful for troubleshooting.
• TOGGLE KEY BKLT OFF?―Allows the technician to toggle the keyboard backlight off.
• REINIT PAGE INFO?―Allows technician to re-initialize all information on the test page.
'ADC' Window:
• PHOTOCELL A, B―Displays the input value of display photocells, between 0 and 9999. The values can
be converted to a percentage by adding a decimal place two digits over from the right (Example: 8035 =
80.35%). If there is a significant split (~30% to 50%) you can expect the display to appear different from
the other display in the aircraft, IF both of their lighting curves are set to the same values. Replace the
display if one photocell reading is significantly different from the other.

Revision D 190-01597-00
• BEZEL THERM―Displays the temperature of the GDU bezel, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• CCFT CRNT 1, 2―Displays an indication of current flowing through the display backlight bulbs.
Number does not reflect actual current value and is not useful for troubleshooting.
• POWER (2.5V, 3.3V, 28 V 1, 2; 1.3V)―Displays power input voltages of various internal components.
(Example: for 2.5V field, 2500 = 2.500 Vdc; for 28V Field, 3633 = 36.33 Vdc) They need to be within
10% of desired voltages. Replace the display if these values are more than 10% from the desired voltage.
• LGHT BUS DC, AC―Displays input value of AC and DC lighting bus inputs, depending on which is
configured. Disregard number if not used in the installation.
• INTRNL TEMP 1, 2―Displays the internal temperature of the GDU, expressed in degrees Celsius.
'TEST' Window:
• IIC EEPROM―Displays the condition of the GDU configuration module EEPROM chip, located in the
backplate connector. It should be green for the PFD and red for the MFD. If it is red on the PFD, check
configuration module wiring and pins for damage before replacing the configuration module.
• DATACARD CHKSUM 1, 2―Requires the use of a special datacard. Tests the datacard reader interface
function. Used for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
• NAND, NOR FLASH, SDRAM―Displays the condition of various GDU internal components.
• A429 LOOP 1, 2―Indicated the status of the GDU 104Xs ARINC 429 channels. A green box indicates
the ARINC 429 loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicated it may not be used or a wiring fault
is present.
• ETHERNET 1, 2, 3―Indicates status of the GDU 104Xs Ethernet channel. A green box indicates the
ETHERNET loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is
present.
• RS-232 1, 2―Indicates status of the GDU 104X’s RS-232 channel. A green box indicates the RS-232
loopback tests passed. A red or black box indicates it may not be used or a wiring fault is present.
• IRDA―Indicates status of GDU 104X IrDA infrared port. Used for Garmin testing, it is not activated at
this time.
• BKUP CAPS―Indicates status of the Backup Capacitor Test. A green box indicates the test passed, a red
box indicates it failed.
'DISCRETE' Window:
GDU System ID 1 GDU System ID 2 GDU System ID 3 Display Mode
Black Black Green MFD
Black Black Black PFD #1
Green Black Black PFD #2
• RVRSNRY MODE 1, 2―Displays the current status of the reversionary modes. Reversionary Mode 1 is
activated by the GMA 1347 reversion button. Reversionary Mode 2 is activated by a second GMA 1347,
if installed. Reversionary 1 input is a ground on Pin 58, reversionary 2 input is a ground on Pin 15.
• PULSE PER SEC 1, 2―Displays status of GPS time synchronization inputs (from GIA) to the GDU.
Used for Garmin testing, not useful for troubleshooting.
• TEST, DEMO MODE SELECT―A green box indicates Pin 53/54 is grounded. These inputs should
have a black box, if either box is green check for connector miswiring or a bent pin.
• FPGA―Displays the condition of the GDU FPGA processor. If it does not pass the unit may not
initialize.

190-01597-00 Revision D
• SYS ID 1, 2, 3―Displays the current system ID assigned to the display. Green indicates that the System
ID pin is strapped to ground. Black indicates that the System ID pin is left ‘open’ and not strapped to
ground. (See Table below) PFD #2 is not used in certain aircraft.
•REMOTE OFF―Allows the display to control power of a remote system. Not used in any installation at
this time.
LED BKLT Test Page
Refer to OEM maintenance documentation for information regarding the LED BKLT Test Page.
LED BKLT Calib Page
Refer to OEM maintenance documentation for information regarding the LED BKLT Calib Page.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Diagnostics Page
NOTE: The Diagnostics page is protected by a boot disk. The page is hidden when the boot disk is not present.
Data
• A list of up to the 99 most recent exceptions for the processor that describes the type of exception and the
day and time for each exception
• Source module, file, and line number of assert, if assert is selected
• Task if applicable
• Registers R0 through R12
• SP register
• LR register
• CPSR register
• PC register
• FSR register
• FADDR register
• CPU trace
• Stack dump
• Power cycles
• Power hours
• Fault
• Temperature Maximum, Minimum, and Average

190-01597-00 Revision D
Operations
• Scroll through the list of exceptions using the FMS knob
• Scroll through the CPU trace by pressing the CPU TRCE softkey then using the FMS knob
• Scroll through the stack dump by pressing the STCK DMP softkey then using the FMS knob
• Delete an exception by highlighting the exception and pressing CLR
• Save the error log to a data card by pressing the SAVE LOG softkey
• Clear the error log by pressing the CLR LOG softkey
• Toggle between viewing the CPU trace and stack dump by pressing the CPU TRCE or STCK DMP
softkeys
• Selecting to scroll through the Exceptions or CPU trace/stack dump windows by pressing the
EXCEPTNS or MEMORY softkeys when an exception has been selected

Revision D 190-01597-00
Ethernet Test Page
The Ethernet Test page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot disk is not
present.
Data
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page displays the following Ethernet statistics for the selected Ethernet
port:
• Good frames received • Good frames transmitted
• Receive collision detections • Transmit max collision errors
• Receive alignment errors • Transmit late collision errors
• Receive overrun errors • Transmit underrun errors
• Receive resource errors • Transmit lost carrier sense
• Receive CRC errors • Transmit frames deferred
• Receive short frame errors • Transmit single collisions
• Number of Flow Control frames received • Transmit multiple collisions
that are not Flow Control Pause Frames
• Number of Flow Control frames transmitted
• Number of Flow Control frames received
• Transmit total collisions
HSDB Statistics
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page displays the following HSDB statistics:
• Pings transmitted • Number of transmitted retry packets
• Number of transmitted periodic packets • Number of aborted transmission packets
• Number of transmitted acknowledgement • Number of write fails
request packets
• Number of received periodic packets
• Number of transmitted acknowledgement
packets
190-01597-00 Revision D
• Number of received acknowledgement • Maximum acknowledgement time in
request packets milliseconds
• Number of received acknowledgement • Number of packets pending
packets
• Number of LRU online changes
• Minimum acknowledgement time in
• Number of overruns
milliseconds
The Serial / Ethernet I/O Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Change the selected Ethernet port using the FMS knob
• Show non-volatile statistics log by pressing the NONVOL softkey
• Clear non-volatile statistics log by pressing the CLR LOG softkey

Revision D 190-01597-00
Video Test Page
The Video Test page is only present when the number of available video decoder sources is greater than zero.
Data
• An image of the selected video source scaled to the available display space.
• Identification of the selected video source in the upper-left corner of the image, as determined by
configuration.
• If the selected video signal is not available, the page displays "NO DATA AVAILABLE".
• Current source configuration information
• Text identifier description for the video source (0-19 characters)
• Source number (1, 2)
• Whether or not the source is configured
• Source standard (NTSC, PAL, AUTO)
• Rotation (0°, 90°, 180°, 270°)
• Original dimensions (width and height)
• Crop (0-49% for each side)
• Size of inset window (a percentage of the main window, 10%-50%)
• Text timeout (0-10s)
• Current source settings
• Brightness (0-100%)
• Contrast (0-100%)
• Saturation (0-100%)
• Digital zoom level (1x, 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x)

190-01597-00 Revision D
The Video Test Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switching to the VIDEO 1 source, by pressing the VIDEO 1 softkey.
• Switching to the VIDEO 2 source, by pressing the VIDEO 2 softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to AUTO mode, by pressing the AUTO softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to NTSC mode, by pressing the NTSC softkey.
• Changing the video format standard to PAL mode, by pressing the PAL softkey.
• Rotating the video image, by pressing the ROTATE softkey.
• Increasing the contrast of the video image, by pressing the CNTRST + softkey.
• Decreasing the contrast of the video image, by pressing the CNTRST - softkey.
• Increasing the brightness of the video image, by pressing the BRIGHT + softkey.
• Decreasing the brightness of the video image, by pressing the BRIGHT - softkey.
• Increasing the saturation of the video image, by pressing the SAT + softkey.
• Decreasing the saturation of the video image, by pressing the SAT - softkey.
• Increasing the zoom level of the video image, by pressing the ZOOM IN softkey.
• Decreasing the zoom level of the video image, by pressing the ZOOM OUT softkey.
• Hiding or showing the video image, by pressing the HIDE softkey.
• Modification of saved configuration settings (when an unlock card is inserted)
• Saving modified configuration settings, by pressing the SAVE softkey.
• Discarding modified configuration settings (and restoring the last saved settings), by pressing the
DISCARD softkey.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Alert Configuration Page
The Alert Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot disk
is not present.
The Alert Configuration page has two display modes, List and Detail, described in the following requirements.
List View Data
The Alert Configuration page displays the following data in List View:
A list of configurable alerts, including:
• Alert ID
• Alert Brief Text
• Alert State (set or cleared)
A list of configurable triggers, including:
• Trigger ID
• Trigger Description
Detail View Data
• The Alert Configuration page displays the following data in Detail View:
• ID of the selected alert
• Brief Text of the selected alert
• Descriptive Text of the selected alert
• Level of the selected alert
• Notify flags of the selected alert
• Acknowledge flags of the selected alert
• Flags value of the selected alert
• Maintenance log section(s) to notify on alert set

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Maintenance log section(s) to notify on alert clear
• Clear flags of the selected alert
• Set-audio of the selected alert
• Clear-audio of the selected alert
• Discrete out controlled by the selected alert
• OEM that created/configured the selected alert
• The OEM revision of the selected alert
• A list of the alert's nodes, each node displaying:
o Node number
o Trigger ID
o Parent node
o Operation
o State
• ID of the selected trigger
• Source of the selected trigger
• Data id of the selected trigger, and description (e.g. discrete id and discrete name)
• Data type of the selected trigger
• Data offset of the selected trigger
• Flags of the selected trigger
• Threshold and threshold operation of the selected trigger
• Extinguish and extinguish operation of the selected trigger
• Set time of the selected trigger
• Clear time of the selected trigger
• OEM that created/configured the selected trigger
• The OEM revision of the selected trigger
List View Operations
In LIST View mode, the Alert Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switch to Detail View mode by pressing the DETAIL softkey
• Switch to Detail View mode by highlighting an alert or trigger and pressing ENT
• Select the Alerts list by pressing the ALERTS softkey
• Select the Triggers list by pressing the TRIGGERS softkey
Detail View Operations
In DETAIL View mode, the Alert Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Switch to List View mode by pressing the • Select the selected trigger to view using the
LIST softkey FMS inner knob on the trigger field
• Select the alert to view using the FMS inner • Modify the selected alert's Brief Text using
knob on the alert field FMS knob entry

Revision D 190-01597-00
• Modify the selected alert's Descriptive Text • Modify the selected trigger's Source using
using FMS knob entry the FMS inner knob and ENT to select from
a dropdown list
• Modify the selected alert's Level using the
FMS inner knob and ENT to select from a • Modify the selected trigger's Data id using
drop-down list FMS knob entry
• Modify the selected alert's Notify flags • Modify the selected trigger's Data type using
using FMS knob entry the FMS inner knob and ENT to select from
a dropdown list
• Modify the selected alert's Flags value using
FMS knob entry • Modify the selected trigger's Data offset
using FMS knob entry
• Modify the selected alert's Acknowledge
flags using FMS knob entry • Modify the selected trigger's Flags using
FMS knob entry
• Modify the selected alert's Clear flags using
FMS knob entry • Modify the selected trigger's Threshold and
threshold operation using the FMS inner
• Modify the selected alert's Set-audio using
knob and ENT to select from a drop-down
FMS knob entry
list
• Modify the selected alert's Clear-audio using
• Modify the selected trigger's Extinguish and
FMS knob entry
extinguish operation using the FMS inner
• Modify the selected alert's Discrete Out knob and ENT to select from a drop-down
using the FMS inner knob and ENT to select list
from a drop-down list
• Modify the selected trigger's Set time using
• Modify the selected alert's OEM Revision FMS knob entry
• Modify the selected trigger's Clear time
• Modify each node's Trigger ID by pressing using FMS knob entry
the NODE softkey and using FMS knob
• Modify the selected trigger's OEM Revision
entry on the trigger ID field
• Modify each node's Parent node by pressing
• Save the modifications to the alert by
the NODE softkey and using FMS knob
pressing the SV ALRT softkey
entry on the parent ID field
• Save the modifications to the trigger by
• Modify each node's Operation using the
pressing the SV TRGR softkey
FMS inner knob and ENT to select from a
drop-down list
Common Operations
The Alert Configuration page allows the following operations in both List and Detail views:
• Acknowledge all alerts by pressing the ACK softkey
• Switch between viewing CAS and LOG alerts by pressing the CAS and LOG softkeys, respectively

190-01597-00 Revision D
DAT Configuration Page
Refer to OEM maintenance documentation for information regarding the DAT Configuration Page.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Airframe Configuration Page
Page Security
The Airframe Configuration page is protected by a boot disk. The page does not allow operations when the boot
disk is not present (level 5 security).
General
• The Airframe Configuration page displays and configure information relating to the specific airframe per
the airframe specific system requirements.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page displays and configures the navigation center offset
with a resolution of 1 foot or 0.1 meters depending on the units configured in the system.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page displays all OEM Tag/Value Pairs for which the Tag
is defined.
• For each airframe, the Airframe Configuration page configures all OEM Values for which the Tag is
defined.

190-01597-00 Revision D
TAWS Configuration Page
The TAWS Setup page is protected by a boot disk, allowing modifications only to the audio message selections
and voice callouts when a configuration unlock card is not present. (level 4 security). The following
annunciations, in yellow text, is displayed if and only if a configuration unlock card is not present:
• AIRPORT CRITERIA FIELDS ARE LOCKED
• CLIMB ANGLE FIELDS ARE LOCKED
• AIRSPEEDS FIELDS ARE LOCKED
Data
The TAWS Setup Configuration page is titled based on the current TAWS alerting configuration as follows:
• "TAWS-A SETUP" if TAWS-A is configured
• "TAWS-B SETUP" if TAWS-B is configured
• "TERRAIN-SVT SETUP" if TERRAIN-SVS is configured
• "TERRAIN PROXIMITY SETUP" if TERRAIN PROXIMITY is configured
• "HTAWS SETUP" if HTAWS-B is configured
• "HTERRAIN-SVS SETUP" if HTERRAIN-SVS is configured
• "TERRAIN PROXIMITY SETUP" if HTERRAIN PROXIMITY is configured
Terrain Alerting Configuration
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the current TAWS configuration.
Airport Criteria (TAWS-A, TAWS-B, TERRAIN-SVS only)
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following data related to airport criteria:
• Runway surface type
• Minimum length (ft)
• Voice Callouts (TAWS-A, HTAWS-B)
Revision D 190-01597-00
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following data related to voice callouts for
each voice callout:
• Whether the selected callout is enabled or disabled
• FLTA Climb Angles (TAWS-A)
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following data related to climb angles:
• Selected entry's altitude (ft)
• Selected entry's angle (degrees)
Configurable Airspeed Parameters (TAWS-A)
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following related to airspeeds:
• Approach speed (kt)
• Maximum gear/flap landing configuration speed (kt)
Audio Message Configuration
The TAWS Setup Configuration page displays the following related to audio messages:
• The text "No Audio Configuration Available" if the TAWS configuration is TERRAIN PROXIMITY or
HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
• The selected aural alert message for each alert type if the TAWS configuration is not TERRAIN
PROXIMITY or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
Operations
The TAWS Setup Configuration page allows the following operations, if the data fields are available:
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page softkeys (if applicable):
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Airport Criteria group by pressing the APT softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Voice Callouts group by pressing the VCO softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Climb Angle group by pressing the CLIMB softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Airspeeds group by pressing the AIRSPD softkey
• Advance highlight to the first field of the Audio Configuration group by pressing the AUDIO softkey
Airport Criteria
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page airport criteria fields (if applicable):
• Select a minimum runway surface (Any, Hard only, Hard/Soft, Water)
• Select a minimum runway length
Voice Callouts
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page voice callout fields (if applicable):
• Select a voice callout to modify
• Enable or Disable the given voice callout
• Set the given voice callout allow or disallow user configurability (HTAWS-B only).
• The VCO 500 callout is not modifiable (always enabled) for TAWS-A configurations.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Climb Angle
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page climb angle fields (if applicable):
• Select a climb angle entry to modify
• Select an altitude for the given climb angle entry
• Select a climb angle for the given climb angle entry
Airspeeds
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page airspeed fields (if applicable):
• Select an approach speed
• Select a maximum landing configuration speed
Audio Configuration
The following operations is allowed for the TAWS Setup Configuration page audio configuration fields (if
applicable):
• Select among the available audio messages for the given alert type or system status message
• Play the selected audio message by pressing ENT

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.3 GIA Group
GIA Serial Configuration Page
Data
The GIA RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GIA unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Set and active speeds for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Set and active data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• ARINC 429 SDI
• Set and active inputs for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Set and active outputs for RS-232 channels 1 through 8
• Port status indication for each ARINC 429 input
Operations
The GIA RS-232 / ARINC 429 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Select set speeds for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 3
• Select set data for ARINC 429 inputs 1 through 8
• Select set data for ARINC 429 outputs 1 through 8

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Select ARINC 429 SDI
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• Clear the non-volatile registry data for the serial configurations by pressing the CLR softkey
GIA RS-485 Configuration Page
Data
The GIA RS-485 Configuration page displays the following data:
• Clocked data interface set and active input/output data type
Operations
The GIA RS-485 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select set data for clocked data interface input/output

Revision D 190-01597-00
GIA I/O Configuration Page
Data
The GIA I/O Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current input / output type selected
• List of discrete I/O channel configurations or analog I/O function configurations
Discrete I/O Channel Configurations
The list of discrete I/O channel configurations displays the following data for each item:
• Discrete I/O channel's set data type
• Discrete I/O channel's active data type
• Discrete I/O channel's current status
• Discrete I/O channel's set inversion status
• Discrete I/O channel's active inversion status
• Discrete input channel's set active debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's active debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time (if discrete in selected)
• Discrete input channel's active inactive debounce time (if discrete in selected)
Analog I/O Function Configurations
The list of analog I/O function configurations displays the following data for each item:
• Analog I/O function
• Analog I/O function's set and active status

190-01597-00 Revision D
Operations
The GIA I/O Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select a GIA unit
• Select input / output type (discrete in, discrete out, analog in, analog out)
• Copy active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
Discrete I/O Channel Configurations
The list of discrete I/O channels allows the following operations for each item:
• Select a discrete I/O channel's set data type
• Select a discrete I/O channel's set inversion status (true or false) (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set active debounce time (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time (if its data type is defined)
• Toggle the signal of a discrete output channel (true or false) (if its data type is defined)
Analog I/O Channel Configurations
The list of analog I/O functions allows the following operations for each item:
• Toggle an analog I/O function's enabled status (true or false)

Revision D 190-01597-00
GIA COM Setup Page
Data
The COM Setup Configuration page displays the following data:
• Calibration communication frequency
• Communication frequency kHz spacing selection
• Communication volume
• Emergency communication volume (set and active data)
• 25 kHz squelch adjustment (set and active data)
• kHz squelch adjustment (set and active data)
• Sidetone adjustment (set and active data)
• Microphone gain adjustment (set and active data)
Operations
The COM Setup Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select calibration communication frequency
• Select communication frequency spacing (8.33 kHz, 25.0 kHz)
• Select communication volume
• Select emergency communication volume
• Select 25.0 kHz squelch adjustment
• Select 8.33 kHz squelch adjustment
• Select sidetone adjustment
• Select microphone gain adjustment
• Store current calibration settings by pressing the STORE softkey (Calibration Method)

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Copy set information to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey (Configuration
Method)
• Copy the active information to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey (Configuration
Method)
GIA Status Page
Data
The GIA Status Configuration page displays the following data reported from GIA 1 or GIA 2:
GPS Status
• GIA with Non-WAAS Capable GPS Receiver
• ROM status
• RAM status
• ASIC status
• Receiver status
GIA with WAAS Capable GPS Receiver
• RTC Battery
• Battery
• PLL Locked
• EEPROM
Glideslope Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• Synthesizer lock status

Revision D 190-01597-00
COM Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• Receive status
• Transmit status
• Low Power status
• Over temperature status
VLOC Status
• ROM status
• EEPROM status
• XILINX status
Main GIA Status
• ROM status • -5V power range status
• Analog calibration status • -12V power range status
• EEPROM 1, 2 status • Aircraft power range A and B status
• FPGA 1, 2 status • Over temperature status
• +28V power range status • Low temperature status
• +12V power range status • +5V backed power status
• +5V power range status • 3V battery status
• +3.3V power range status • BKUP CAPS Backup capacitor status
Analog Status
• Aircraft power A and B
• Temperature
Discrete Status
• System ID Program 1 and 2
Fuel
• System Fuel Type
Operations
The GIA Status Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select which GIA to display data for

190-01597-00 Revision D
GIA CAN Configuration Page
Data
The GIA CAN Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current CAN channel selected
• Set and active input data type for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Set and active output data type for CAN outputs on channels 1 and 2
• Set and active speeds for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Set and active on/off status for five left, two center, and five right fuel packets for CAN channels 1 and 2
Operations
The GIA CAN Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GIA unit
• Select CAN channel
• Select set input for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set output for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set speed for CAN channels 1 and 2
• Select set for five left, two center, and five right fuel packets for CAN channels 1 and 2

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.4 GSD Page Group
GSD ARINC Configuration Page
Data
The GSD ARINC Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GSD unit selected
• Set and active speeds for ARINC inputs 1 through 24
• Set and active speeds for ARINC outputs 1 through 16
• Set and active data type for ARINC inputs 1 through 24
• Set and active data type for ARINC outputs 1 through 16
• Port status indication for each ARINC input
Operations
The GSD ARINC Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GSD unit
• Select set speeds for ARINC inputs 1 through 24
• Select set speeds for ARINC outputs 1 through 16
• Select set data type for ARINC inputs 1 through 24
• Select set data type for ARINC outputs 1 through 16
• Clear the non-volatile registry data for the serial configurations by pressing the CLR NV softkey

190-01597-00 Revision D
GSD RS-485 Configuration Page
Data
• The GSD RS-485 Configuration page displays the following data:
Operations
The GSD RS-485 Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GSD unit

Revision D 190-01597-00
GSD I/O Configuration Page
Data
• The GSD I/O Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current input type selected
• List of discrete input channel configurations
• Discrete I/O Channel Configurations
The List Of Discrete Input Channel Configurations Displays The Following Data For Each Item:
• Discrete input channel's set data type
• Discrete input channel's active data type
• Discrete input channel's current status
• Discrete input channel's set inversion status
• Discrete input channel's active inversion status
• Discrete input channel's set active debounce time
• Discrete input channel's active debounce time
• Discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time
• Discrete input channel's active inactive debounce time
Operations
The GSD I/O Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select a GSD unit
• Discrete input Channel Configurations

190-01597-00 Revision D
The list of discrete input channels allows the following operations:
• Select a discrete input channel's set data type
• Select a discrete input channel's set inversion status (true or false) (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set active debounce time (if its data type is defined)
• Modify a discrete input channel's set inactive debounce time (if its data type is defined)
GSD Status Page
Data
The GSD Status Configuration page displays the following data reported from GSD 1 or GSD 2:
MAIN STATUS
• FPGA 1 status
• FPGA 2 status
• RAM status
• ROM status
• Over temperature alert status
• Under temperature alert status
• System failure status
• All status flags valid status
• Supercap failure count
• Active mode

Revision D 190-01597-00
Hardware Statistics
• Maximum system temperature
• Minimum system temperature
• Number of unit power ups
• Total unit on time (hours)
Voltage Range Monitor
• Valid system voltages flag status • +1.2V CH 1 power range status
• +28V power range status • +1.2V CH 2 power range status
• +12V power range status • -5V power range status
• +5V power range status • -12V power range status
• +3.3V power range status • Aircraft power range A status
• +2.5V CH 1 power range status • Aircraft power range B status
• +2.5V CH 2 power range status • Supercap voltage monitor status
• +1.3V power range status
Analog
• Aircraft power A
• Aircraft power B
• Temperature
Discrete
• System ID Program 1
• System ID Program 2
Fuel
• System Fuel Type
Operations
The GSD Status Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select a GSD unit

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6.4.5 GEA Page Group
Engine Configuration Page
Data
• ALT AMPS 1, 2―Alternator Amps measurement, expressed in amperes.
• PROP D ICE CUR 1, 2―Propeller De-Ice current measurement, expressed in amperes.
• AIRCRFT PWR 1, 2―Aircraft power input measurement, expressed in volts DC.
• BATT VOLTS 1, 2―Battery Voltage measurement, expressed in volts DC.
• ENGINE HOURS―Displays engine time in hours, as measured by the engine tachometer input.
• TACH SENSOR 1, 2―Tachometer sensor measurement, expressed in revolutions per minute (RPM).
• D ICE PRESS―De-Ice system pressure measurement, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
• FUEL PRESS ENG 1, 2―Fuel Pressure measurement, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).
• FUEL QTY RIGHT, LEFT―Fuel Quantity measurement, expressed in gallons (GL).
• FUEL FLW ENG 1, 2―Fuel Flow measurement, expressed in gallons per hour (GL/HR).
• MAP ENG 1, 2―Manifold Air Pressure sensor reading, expressed in inches/mercury (“/Hg).
• VAC ENG 1, 2―Vacuum measurement, expressed in inches/mercury (“/Hg).
• OP ENG 1, 2―Oil Pressure, expressed in pounds per square inch (PSI).

Revision D 190-01597-00
• N1, N2, N3 ENG 1, 2―Compressor spool speeds, expressed in percent RPM. (Turbine aircraft only)
• EGT ENG 1, 2 (1-6)—Exhaust Gas Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• ITT ENG 1, 2—Interstage Turbine Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius. (Turbine aircraft only)
• TIT ENG 1, 2—Turbine Intake Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius. (Turbine aircraft only)
• OT ENG 1, 2—Oil Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.
• CHT ENG 1, 2 (1-6)—Cylinder Head Temperature, expressed in degrees Celsius.
GEA Status Page
There are nine page modes for the GEA Status page. Each mode is accessible via softkeys and displayed data is
described below:
Main Mode
The GEA Status Configuration page displays the following data for GEA 1, GEA 2, or GEA 3:
• Calibration valid • COM channel over utilized status
• Configuration valid • Main board aircraft power #1
• Internal voltage exceeded flag • Main board aircraft power #2
• Main EEPROM failure status • Main board internal temperature
• EEPROM A failure status • Main board external temperature
• EEPROM B failure status • Main board +2.5 reference voltage
• RAM failure status • Main board +5 external voltage
• ROM failure status • Main board +10 external voltage
• XILINX failure status • Main board +12 external voltage
• RS-485 (1 and 2) failure status • Main board -2.1 internal voltage

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Main board +2.5 internal voltage • Input / Output B board +2.5 reference
voltage
• Main board +3.3 internal voltage
• Input / Output B board -2.1 internal voltage
• Main board +5 internal voltage
• Input / Output B board +3.3 internal voltage
• Main board +5.75 transformer voltage
• Input / Output B board +5 internal voltage
• Main board +13.8 transformer voltage
• Input / Output B board -5.75 transformer
• Main board +30 transformer voltage
voltage
• Input / Output A board +2.5 reference
• Input / Output B board internal temperature
voltage
• Input / Output B board external temperature
• Input / Output A board -2.1 internal voltage
• Input / Output B board backshell
• Input / Output A board +3.3 internal voltage
temperature
• Input / Output A board +5 internal voltage
Data Viewing Modes
The following input viewing modes is available via softkey:
• Analog/Current
• Analog Input
• Current Monitor
• Engine Temperature
• Backshell Thermocouple
• Annunciator
• Digital Input
• Discrete Input
• For each input viewing mode, the following data is viewable:
• List of each input/output channel for the selected GEA
• Configured data type for each input/output channel
• Data validity of each input/output channel
• Data value of each input/output channel
Operations
In addition to the softkey operations, the GEA Status Configuration page allows the following operation:
• Select which GEA to display data for

Revision D 190-01597-00
GEA Configuration Page
Page Security
The GEA Configuration page allows modification after entering the key sequence: (softkey 1, softkey 2, softkey
3, softkey 4)
Data
Display Format 1
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the analog/current monitor in,
analog in, current monitor, engine temperature analog in, and the backshell thermocouples:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set parameter 1
• GEA board • Set parameter 2
• Channel • Set parameter 3
• Set input type • Set parameter 4
• Set sensor type • Set parameter 5
• Set update rate • Set parameter 6
• Set gain • Set filter
• Set HSCM control enabled status • Set hysteresis
• Set constant current enabled status • Active input type
• Set resistor divider enabled status • Active input data value
• Set bipolar enabled status • Active sensor type
• Set ground low side enable status • Active update rate

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Active gain • Active parameter 2
• Active HSCM control enabled status • Active parameter 3
• Active constant current enabled status • Active parameter 4
• Active resistor divider enabled status • Active parameter 5
• Active bipolar enabled status • Active parameter 6
• Active ground low side enabled status • Active filter
• Active parameter 1 • Active hysteresis
Display Format 2
Digital Channel Display
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the digital channel:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set hysteresis
• GEA board • Active input type
• Channel • Active input data value
• Set input type • Active sensor type
• Set sensor type • Active update rate
• Set update rate • Active parameter 1
• Set parameter 1 • Active parameter 2
• Set parameter 6 • Active filter
• Set filter • Active hysteresis
Digital Channel Configured as a Discrete Channel Display
The GEA Configuration page displays Display Format 3 (see section below) with the following additional data
when viewing data for the digital channel configured as a discrete channel:
• Set sensor type
• Active sensor type
Display Format 3
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the discrete
channel:
• GIA/GEA pair • Set inactive debounce time
• GEA board • Active input type
• Channel • Active input data value
• Set input type • Active "active low/high" setting
• Set active low/high setting • Active debounce time
• Set active debounce time • Active inactive debounce time
Revision D 190-01597-00
Display Format 4
The GEA Configuration page displays the following data when viewing data for the annunciator channel:
• GIA/GEA pair
• GEA board
• Channel
• Set data type
• Set active low/high setting
• Active data type
• Active data value
• Active "active low/high" setting
Operations
Display Selection
There is a means to change the page to display one of the following via the listed softkey for each option:
• Analog/Current monitor in via the ANLG/CRNT softkey
• Analog in via the ANLG IN softkey
• Current monitor via the CRNT MNTR softkey
• Engine temperature analog in via the ENG TEMP softkey
• Backshell thermocouple via the BKSHELL softkey
• Digital Channel via the DIGITAL softkey
• Annunciator Channel via the ANNUNC softkey
• Discrete Channel via the DISCRETE softkey
Verification
There is a means to initiate a verification process to check each of the following by pressing the VERIFY softkey:
• Analog/Current monitor in
• Analog in
• Current monitor
• Engine temperature analog in
• Backshell thermocouple
• Digital Channel
• Annunciator Channel
• Discrete Channel
Configuration Copying
There is a means to copy the active settings to the set settings and vice versa for the following by pressing the
COPY softkey, then pressing either the THIS CHNL or ALL CHNLS softkey, then pressing the ACTV>SET or
SET>ACTV softkey respectively:
• Analog/Current monitor in
• Analog in

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Current monitor
• Engine temperature analog in
• Backshell thermocouple
• Digital Channel
• Annunciator Channel
• Discrete Channel
Display Format 1
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the analog/current monitor
in, analog in, current monitor, engine temperature analog in, and the backshell thermocouples:
• Select GIA/GEA pair • Select set bipolar enabled status
• Select GEA board • Select ground low side enabled status
• Select channel • Modify set parameter 1
• Select set input type • Modify set parameter 2
• Select set sensor type • Modify set parameter 3
• Select set update rate • Modify set parameter 4
• Select set gain • Modify set parameter 5
• Select set HSCM control enabled status • Modify set parameter 6
• Select set constant current enabled status • Modify set filter
• Select set resistor divider enabled status • Modify set hysteresis
Display Format 2
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing
data for the digital channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair • Modify set parameter 2
• Select GEA board • Modify set parameter 3
• Select channel • Modify set parameter 4
• Select set input type • Modify set parameter 5
• Select set sensor type • Modify set parameter 6
• Select set update rate • Modify set filter
• Modify set parameter 1 • Modify set hysteresis

Revision D 190-01597-00
Display Format 3
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the discrete channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair
• Select GEA board
• Select channel
• Select set input type
• Select set active low/high setting
• Modify set active debounce time
• Modify set inactive debounce time
Display Format 4
The GEA Configuration page allows the following operations when viewing data for the annunciator channel:
• Select GIA/GEA pair
• Select GEA board
• Select channel
• Select set data type
• Select set active low/high setting

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6.4.6 GTX Page Group
Transponder Airframe Configuration Page
Data
The Transponder Configuration page displays the following set data and active data for each configured
transponder:
• Address type • VFR code
• Address • Enhanced surveillance status
• Flight ID type • ADS-B transmit mode
• Flight ID • Aircraft width
• Aircraft weight • Aircraft length
• Maximum airspeed • Surveillance integrity type
Operations
The Transponder Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select transponder unit
• Select address type
• Modify address
• Select flight ID type
• Modify flight ID

Revision D 190-01597-00
• Select aircraft weight
• Select maximum airspeed
• Modify VFR code
• Modify enhanced surveillance status
• Modify ADS-B transmit mode
• Modify aircraft width
• Modify aircraft length
• Modify surveillance integrity type
• Copying set data to active data by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Copying active data to set data by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey (when only one transponder is
configured)
• Copying transponder #1 active data to set data and transponder #2 active data by pressing the ACT1>SET
softkey (when two transponders are configured)
• Copying transponder #2 active data to set data and transponder #1 active data by pressing the ACT2>SET
softkey (when two transponders are configured)
Transponder Wiring Configuration Page
Refer to the OEM aircraft maintenance manual for information on the Transponder Wiring Configuration Page.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6.4.7 GRS Page Group
AHRS/Air Data Input Configuration Page
Data
The AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page displays the following data:
• AHRS true heading angle (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• AHRS roll and pitch angles (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• AHRS X, Y, and Z accelerations (AHRS 1, 2, Standby)
• Air data static air temperatures (ADC 1, 2)
• Air data true and indicated airspeeds (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air data vertical speed (ADC 1, 2)
• Air data barometric(ADC 1, 2), density (ADC 1, 2), and pressure altitudes (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air Data Static Pressure (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Air Data Differential Pressure (ADC 1, 2)
• Air Data Mach (ADC 1, 2, Standby)
• Low Speed Awareness Ratio (ADC 1, 2)
• Green Circle Ratio (ADC 1, 2)
• Yellow Band Ratio (ADC 1, 2)
• Yellow Band Offset (ADC 1, 2)

Revision D 190-01597-00
Operations
• No operations exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.
• No menu options exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.
• No softkey options exist for the AHRS / Air Data Input Configuration page.
GRS/GMU Calibration Page
Page Security
The GRS/GMU Calibration page allows modification after entering the key sequence: (softkey 9, softkey 10,
softkey 11, softkey 12)
Data
The GRS / GMU Calibration Configuration page displays the following data:
• Current GRS unit selected
• Current procedure selected
• GPS communication status
• Air data communication status
• Magnetometer communication status
• Pre-calibration checklist
• Calibration instructions
• Angle and tolerance level which aircraft must turn to right (during magnetometer calibration)
• Angle and tolerance level to which aircraft must turn (during heading offset calibration)
• Number of seconds to hold aircraft's current position (during magnetometer and heading offset
calibrations)
• Calibration checklist (during pitch / roll offset calibration)
• Calibration status (displayed at appropriate times during each calibration)
• Engine run-up test results (displayed at end of engine run-up test)
• Magnetometer interference test results (displayed at end of magnetometer interference test)
• Primary engine instrumentation window with the thumbnail disabled (see the airframe specific
• requirements document; all supported airframe requirements documents are listed in GDU-SsSWR)

190-01597-00 Revision D
Operations
The GRS / GMU Calibration Configuration page allows the following operations for each field on the page:
• Select a GRS unit from the GRS drop-down list
• Select procedure (pitch/roll offset, magnetometer, heading offset, engine run-up test, magnetometer
interference test) from the procedure drop-down list
• Confirm each item in pre-calibration checklist by highlighting the row and pressing ENT, which
toggles the status box for that row from black to green
• Confirm user is ready to start the procedure by pressing ENT on each verification step, then selecting
the CONFIRM field, then pressing ENT
• Confirm user is at instructed heading (during heading offset calibration)
• Confirm each item in calibration checklist (during pitch / roll calibration)
• Confirm aircraft is level (during pitch / roll offset calibration)
• Confirm user is aware of calibration status (upon error or success of each calibration) by requiring
ENT press before continuing
• Confirm user is aware of engine run-up test results (upon success or failure) by requiring ENT press
before continuing
• Confirm user is aware of magnetometer interference test results (upon success or failure) by
requiring ENT press before continuing the units, the GMU44 has failed or a GRS communication
port failure.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.8 ADC Page Group
ADC Configuration Page
Page Security
GDU airspeed filter time constants, GDU airspeed filter transition points, GDU vertical speed filter time
constant, GDU airspeed anticipation gain and maximum, and altitude and airspeed error correction alert
statuses are only displayed and editable with an unlock card.
Data
The ADC Configuration page displays the following data:
• Status of the altitude 1 error correction alert
• Status of the altitude 2 error correction alert
• Status of the airspeed 1 error correction alert
• Status of the airspeed 2 error correction alert
• GDU airspeed filter time constants (low, high)
• GDU airspeed filter time constant airspeed transition points (to low, to high)
• GDU vertical speed filter time constant
• GDU airspeed anticipation gain
• GDU airspeed anticipation maximum
Operations
The ADC Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Enable or disable the altitude 1 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the altitude 2 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the airspeed 1 error correction alert
• Enable or disable the airspeed 2 error correction alert
• Edit GDU airspeed filter time constants
• Edit GDU airspeed filter time constant airspeed transition points (to low, to high)
• Edit GDU vertical speed filter time constant
• Edit GDU airspeed anticipation gain
• Edit GDU airspeed anticipation maximum
190-01597-00 Revision D
4.6.4.9 GFC Page Group
GFC Configuration Page
Data
The GFC Configuration page displays the following data:
• Selected GIA unit (1 or 2)
• Settable and active AP disconnect removed flight director setting (yes, no)
• Settable and active pitch servo
• Settable and active roll servo
• Settable and active yaw servo
• Settable and active pitch trim servo
• Configured roll trim servo axis type (ROLL TRIM, YAW SAS)
• Settable and active roll trim or yaw SAS servo
• Settable and active yaw trim servo
Operations
The GFC Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Activating settable settings by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• Selecting GIA unit (1 or 2) from the GIA unit drop-down list
• Setting AP disconnect removes flight director setting (yes, no)
• Setting pitch servo
• Setting roll servo
• Setting yaw servo
• Setting pitch trim servo
• Setting the roll trim servo axis type (ROLL TRIM, YAW SAS)
• Setting roll trim or yaw SAS servo
• Setting yaw trim servo

Revision D 190-01597-00
GFC Status Page
Data
The following data is displayed on the GFC Status page:
• For each GIA and configured GSA or GTA, the GFC Status page displays the state of the LRU's AP
DISC input.
For each configured GSA or GTA, the GFC Status page is capable of the following:
• Display the state of the program lines for each processor
• Display the PFT state for each processor
• Display a test status message during execution of a servo slip-clutch or yaw SAS test.
For each configured GSA, the GFC Status page is capable of the following:
• Display the state of the following Boolean inputs: clutch engagement status, high resolution load cell
calibration, and high range load cell calibration
• Display the servo motor's speed (in RPM), voltage, and current as reported by the control processor.
• Display the servo's torque (in in-lb) as reported by the monitor processor.
• Display numeric results of slip-clutch test (in in-lb).
For each configured GTA, the GFC Status page is capable of the following:
• Display the state of the SERVO ENABLE input
• Display the command voltage and current of the GTA.
Operations
The following operations are available on the GFC Status page:
For each GIA and configured GSA or GTA, the GFC Status page provides an interface for restoring the part
number of the certification gains to its default value.
For each configured GSA, the GFC Status page is capable of the following:

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Provide an interface for engaging/disengaging the clutch
• Provide an interface for driving the servo at a specified RPM or stopping the servo
• Provide an interface for initiating a servo slip-clutch test on a specific axis.
• Provide an interface for initiating a servo slip-clutch test on all axes.
• For each configured GTA, the GFC Status page provides an interface for driving the GTA at a
specified voltage or stopping the GTA command
• If the yaw SAS servo is configured on GIA 1 and the PFT state for each processor is passed, then the
GFC Status page provides an interface for initiating a yaw SAS servo test on this servo.
• If a servo slip-clutch test or a yaw SAS servo test is in progress, the GFC status page provides an
interface for canceling the diagnostic test
Related Functionality
For each configured GSA or GTA, the GFC Status page is capable of the following:
• Output the currently selected servo axis on HSDB.
• If the state of AP DISC input into any of the configured LRUs becomes inactive, the GFC Status
page resets all engagement/driving commands

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.10 GMA Page Group
GMA Status Page
Data
• Selected GMA unit
Status
• Unit Type
• Power Cycles
• Power Hours
• CPU1 Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 RAM Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 RAM Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 NonVol Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 NonVol Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU1 Electrical Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• CPU2 Electrical Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• FPGA Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Key Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Audio Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Routing Fault Status (green check equals no fault)
• Clip Fault Status (green check equals no fault)

190-01597-00 Revision D
Discrete In
• CPU1 GMA2 Strap Value (Low = GMA1, High = GMA2)
• CPU2 GMA2 Strap Value (Low = GMA1, High = GMA2)
• Pilot Push-To-Command Value
• Copilot Push-To-Command Value
• Passenger Push-To-Command Value
• Pilot Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Copilot Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Passenger Stereo Headset Short Status - Left and Right side (green check equals no short)
• Pilot Push-To-Talk Value
• Copilot Push-To-Talk Value
• Generic Inputs 1-10 Values
Discrete Out
• Exit Fail Safe Status (green check equals unit is out of fail safe mode)
• Middle Marker Sensitivity Value
• Digital Onside Push-To-Talk 1 Value
• Digital Onside Push-To-Talk 2 Value
• Digital Cross side Push-To-Talk 1 Value
• Digital Cross side Push-To-Talk 2 Value
• COM1 Microphone Key Value
• COM2 Microphone Key Value
• Generic Outputs A-G Values
• Generic Lamps A-C Values
Voltage
GMA36 Voltages
• Aircraft1 Supply Voltage Value
• Aircraft2 Supply Voltage Value
• 12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
• +12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
• -12 Volt Supply Monitor Value
Temperature
• Current Temperature (in Celsius)
• Minimum Temperature (in Celsius)
• Maximum Temperature (in Celsius)

Revision D 190-01597-00
GMA Volume Configuration Page
Data
• Selected GMA Unit
• Selected Volume Configuration Type
• Selected Output Range To Be Displayed
Volume Configuration
A lookup table representing the adjustable volume configuration setting for any specified input/output pair.
The actual setting is equivalent to the value in the top row (the output) + the value in the leftmost column
(the input) + the intersection point. Each of these settings are individually displayed in the following manner:
• The value in the top row (output). This value will affect all inputs for that output.
• The value in the left column (input). This value will affect all outputs for that input.
• The value at an intersection. This value will only affect that individual input/output pairing.
Operations
The Digital GMA Volume Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Select Volume Configuration Type (Minimum or Maximum)
• Select Output Range to be Displayed (1-24 or 25-48)
A lookup table representing the adjustable volume configuration setting for any specified input/output pair.
The actual setting is equivalent to the value in the top row (the output) + the value in the leftmost column
(the input) + the intersection point. Each of these settings can be individually modified in the following
manner:
• Modifying the value in the top row (output) will affect all inputs for that output.
• Modifying the value in the left column (input) will affect all outputs for that input.
• Modifying the value at an intersection will only affect that individual input/output pairing.

190-01597-00 Revision D
GMA Squelch Configuration Page
Data
SELECTED GMA UNIT
AUDIO CONFIGURATION
• Set and active squelch threshold for all 95 inputs
NOTE: This value represents the volume the input must receive to break squelch.
• Set and active squelch persistence for all 95 inputs
NOTE: This value represents the length of time the input volume must be below the squelch threshold to
close squelch once it has been broken.
Operations
The Digital GMA Squelch Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration for the squelch threshold for any of the 95 inputs (Decibels)
NOTE: This value represents the volume the input must receive to break squelch.
• Modify the set configuration for the squelch persistence for any of the 95 inputs (milliseconds)
NOTE: This value represents the length of time the input volume must be below the squelch threshold to
close squelch once it has been broken.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GMA Options Configuration Page
Data
The Digital GMA Options Configuration page displays the following data:
Selected GMA Unit
Audio Configuration
• Text string for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options
• Set and active configuration setting for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options
Operations
The Digital GMA Options Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration setting for any of the 256 generic audio configuration options (User,
On, or Off)
• Selected GMA unit
• Set and active setting for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Set and active audio offset threshold
• Set and active audio off debounce
• Set and active HI sensitivity offset
• Set and active LO sensitivity offset

190-01597-00 Revision D
GMA Marker Beacon Configuration Page
Data
The Digital GMA Marker Beacon Configuration page displays the following data:
Selected GMA Unit
Marker Beacon
• Set and active setting for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Set and active audio offset threshold
• Set and active audio off debounce
• Set and active HI sensitivity offset
• Set and active LO sensitivity offset
Operations
The Digital GMA Marker Beacon Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Select GMA unit
• Modify the set configuration for the disablement of the high sensitivity discrete
• Modify the set configuration for the audio offset threshold (Decibels)
NOTE: This value represents how soon the pilot will hear the marker beacon tone before the marker beacon
light illuminates.
• Modify the set configuration for the audio off debounce (milliseconds)
NOTE: The value represents how long the modulated marker beacon signal can drop below the audio offset
threshold value before the marker beacon tone will stop (very similar to squelch persistence).
• Modify the set configuration for the HI sensitivity offset value (unit less)
• Modify the set configuration for the LO sensitivity offset value (unit less)

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.11 GDL Page Group
GDL 69 Configuration Page
Configuration
• SELECT GDL ANTENNA―selects the GDL antenna.
• ANTENNA GAIN (LOWER dB)―sets the antenna gain value.
• CABLE LOSS INCLUDING INLINE ATTENUATIONS IF USED (NOMINAL dB)―Sets the
inline cable loss attenuation value.
• GDL CONFIGURABLE ATTENUATION (dB)―sets the desired GDL attenuation value.
• ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, 4―enables and/or disables the desired Ethernet port.
NOTE
‘AUDIO RADIO’ refers to the XM audio receiver installed in the GDL. ‘DATA RADIO’
refers to the XM data receiver installed in both the GDL 69 and GDL.
Data
• ID―displays the identification number for the GDL.
• ACTIVE―displays the active status for the GDL.
• SIGNAL―displays the signal level for the GDL:
0 – no signal
1 – weak signal
2 – adequate signal
3 – good signal
NOTE
Levels 2 and 3 should allow for proper operation of all GDL audio and weather options.
Levels 0 and 1 are likely indications of problems with availability. A “204” message in the
signal field indicates that signal information has not initialized.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Diagnostics (For XM use only, not useful for troubleshooting)
• QUALITY OF SERVICE―displays the quality of service for the GDL.
• TERRESTRIAL ERROR STATUS―displays the terrestrial error status for the GDL.
• SATELLITE 1 ERROR―displays the error status for satellite 1.
• SATELLITE 2 ERROR―displays the error status for satellite 2.
• TUNER STATUS―displays the tuner status for the GDL.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GDL Status Page
Hardware Statistics
The GDL hardware statistics are displayed, including:
• The current system temperature in Celsius
• The maximum overall system temperature in Celsius
• The minimum overall system temperature in Celsius
• The unit power up count
• The unit power on time in hours
• The hardware version of the main GDL board
• The hardware version of the memory board on the GDL
Discrete
The GDL discrete data is displayed, including:
• System ID pin status
• Attached GSR56 #1 or #2's heat OK status
• POTS phone on hook status
Hardware Failures
The GDL hardware failures is displayed, including:
• If the system temperature reading is invalid
• If the system temperature is too high
• If the system temperature is too low
• If the system NAND (flash memory) has failed
• If the memory board NAND (flash memory) has failed
• If the Wi-Fi module has failed
• If the system hardware statistics detection has failed

190-01597-00 Revision D
Voltage Range Monitor
The voltage monitor readings and failure statuses is displayed for all voltage monitors, which include:
• +24V (in millivolts)
• +3.3V (in millivolts)
• -5V (in millivolts)
• -12V (in millivolts)
• Aircraft power A (in millivolts)
• Aircraft power B (in millivolts)
• Fan (in milliamperes)
• POTS battery (in millivolts)

Revision D 190-01597-00
GDL Configuration Page
Enabled Functionality
The GDL functionality that is enabled by configuration is displayed, including:
• Data logging/report functionality
• Voice communication
• Wi-Fi communication
Phone Settings
• The set and active setting for if the GDL's audio system 1 phone is connected is displayed
• The set and active setting for if the GDL's POTS phone is connected is displayed
Volume Settings
The set and active volume in and volume out in percentage for all GDL phones is displayed, including:
• POTS for the internal phone in the cabin
• AUD 1 for the internal cockpit phone
• IRIDIUM 1 for the external GSR56 #1 phone
• TONE for the playback of tones (volume out only)
• FLIGHT VOICE LOG for the FVL (flight voice logger) microphone (volume in only)
The audio system 1 (cockpit phone) status is displayed, including:
• IDLE if the phone not busy
• RINGING if a call is incoming
• DIAL TONE if there is a dial tone
• WAITING if a phone dialed is busy
• DIALING when calling another phone
• CONNECTED when talking with another phone

190-01597-00 Revision D
• FAILED if the phone has failed
• DISCONNECTING if the phone is closing a connection
• UNKNOWN if an unspecified phone status was provided or if there is no communication about the
phone status
If the audio system 1 (cockpit phone) status is CONNECTED, the phone that audio system 1 is connected to
is displayed, including:
• CONFERENCE if connected to more than one phone
• UNKNOWN if no connected phone(s) was specified or if connected to unspecified phones
Operations
The following operations are available on the GDL Configuration Page:
• Whether or not the GDL's audio system 1 is connected is selectable
• Whether or not the GDL's audio system 1 is connected is only be selectable if voice functionality is
enabled for the GDL
• Whether or not the GDL's POTS is connected is selectable
• Whether or not the GDL's POTS is connected is only selectable if voice functionality is enabled for
the GDL
The volume in and volume out percentages for all GDL phones is modifiable, including:
• AUD 1 for the internal cockpit phone
• TONE for the playback of tones (volume out only)
• FLIGHT VOICE LOG for the FVL (flight voice logger) microphone (volume in only)
• Modification of set volume in and volume out percentages for all GDL phones is disabled if voice
functionality is disabled for the GDL
• The cockpit phone is able to be commanded to dial by pressing the DIAL softkey
• The phone number pop-up page is used to collect the number to dial
The DIAL softkey is enabled for the cockpit phone when all of the following are true:
• The phone status is IDLE or DIAL TONE
• There is another phone configured as available besides the cockpit phone
• The cockpit phone is able to commanded to end calls by pressing the HANGUP softkey
The HANGUP softkey is enabled for the cockpit phone when any of the following are true:
• The phone status is RINGING
• The phone status is WAITING
• The phone status is DIALING
• The phone status is CONNECTED
• The phone status is FAILED
Revision D 190-01597-00
• The phone status is DIAL TONE
• The GDL is able to be commanded to play or stop a tone on all GDL phones for volume adjustment
by toggling the TONE softkey
• The TONE softkey is disabled if there is no communication about the cockpit phone status
• Set information is able to be copied to the active information by pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
• A confirmation page is displayed asking if a user is sure they want to activate parameter settings
when the copy set information to active information operation is initially triggered
• Active information is able to be copied to the set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey
• A confirmation page is displayed asking if a user is sure they want to copy active settings when the
copy active information to set information operation is initially triggered
Related Functionality
Each cockpit phone command sent to the GDL is verified, displaying a message when the following errors
occur:
• A generic error occurred while processing the dial phone command
• A generic error occurred while processing the hang-up phone command
• The phone command timed out
Each tone command sent to the GDL is verified, displaying a message when the following errors occur:
• A generic error occurred while processing the tone command
• The tone command timed out

190-01597-00 Revision D
GSR (Iridium) Configuration Page
Configuration
The set and active values for whether or not the GSR56 is configured to be available is displayed by
displaying what the GSR56 is connected through, including:
• GIA1 (N/A for active data)
• GIA2 (N/A for active data)
• GDL
• NONE
• UNKNOWN (for active data only)
Permission Level
The set and active permission level of the GSR56 is displayed, including:
• NONE if the GSR56 has no permissions
• VOICE if the GSR56 can perform voice communication
• DATA if the GSR56 can perform data communication
• SMS if the GSR56 can perform SMS text message communication
• UNKNOWN (for active data only)
Enabled Functionality
The set and active GSR56 functionality that is enabled is displayed, including:
• Whether or not voice communication is prioritized over data communication
• The set default international code shall be displayed
Operations
Operations available on the GSR56 Configuration Page are as follows:
• The default international code is modifiable.
• Default international code's can only be composed of the following characters:
o Digits "0" through "9"
o The pound key "#"
o The star key "*"

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.12 RMT Group
Remote Controller Status Page
Data
The Remote Controller Status page displays the following data:
• Current Remote Controller unit selected (GCU/GMC)
• The type of GCU or GMC configured
Selected Remote Controller's serial port #1 status:
• Configured GDU on Remote Controller serial port
• Online status of GDU configured on Remote Controller serial port (online or offline)
• GDU serial channel configured for Remote Controller interface
• Status of link from GDU to Remote Controller serial port (okay, fail, inactive)
Selected Remote Controller's serial port #2 status:
• Configured GDU on Remote Controller serial port
• Online status of GDU configured on Remote Controller serial port (online or offline)
• GDU serial channel configured for Remote Controller interface
• Status of link from GDU to Remote Controller serial port (okay, fail, inactive)
Product data for the selected Remote Controller:
• Part Number
• Version
• Product String
• Description
• Copyright
• Serial Number
• Model Number
190-01597-00 Revision D
• Functions Present
Alert status for the selected Remote Controller:
• Configuration mismatch status (active or inactive)
• Unit failure - inoperative status (active or inactive)
• Stuck key status (active or inactive)
• Stuck key alert message text
Operations
The Remote Controller Status page allows the following operations:
• Select Remote Controller unit using the FMS knob
• Acknowledge the current Remote Controller alerts by pressing the AK ALRTS softkey
• Enable annunciator test mode by pressing the ANN TEST softkey

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.6.4.13 GWX Page Group
GWX Configuration Page
Data
The GWX Configuration page displays the following data:
• GWX attitude data source (NONE, HSDB, A429, or ANALOG GYRO)
• GWX attitude pitch (degrees with 0.01 degree precision)
• GWX attitude roll (degrees with 0.01 degree precision)
GWX fault status boxes (green check for OK, red x for FAIL):
• Electrical
• AFC
• Config
• 400Hz
• Temp
• EEPROM
• Attitude
• RX TX
• RAM
• High Volt

190-01597-00 Revision D
• CAL
• FPGA
• Settable and active radar internal pitch trim (within +/- 4 degrees with 0.05 degree precision)
• Settable and active radar internal roll trim (within +/- 4 degrees with 0.05 degree precision)
• Non-modifiable return bins (only modifiable via configuration upload)
• Settable and active extended scan for GWX7x only (enable or disable)
• Settable and active antenna size for GWX7x only (10-INCH, 12-INCH, or 18-INCH)
• Settable and active average cruise speed for GWX7x only (0 to 999 knots)
• GDU-calculated configuration CRC
• GWX-calculated configuration CRC
Operations
The GWX Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Copy the set information to the active information by any of the following:
o Pressing the SET>ACTV softkey
o Pressing ENT while a settable configuration field is highlighted
• Modify the set radar internal pitch trim using the FMS knob
• Modify the set radar internal roll trim using the FMS knob
• Modify the set extended scan for GWX7x only (enable or disable)
• Modify the set antenna size for GWX7x only (10-INCH, 12-INCH, or 18-INCH)
• Modify the set average cruise speed for GWX7x only (0 to 999 knots)

Revision D 190-01597-00
GWX Troubleshooting Table
The table below lists the various GWX fault indication descriptions and corrective actions.
NOTE
The fault indications are reset if PFD1 is transitioned from normal mode to configuration
mode. It will return if the fault is persistent. It may not return if the fault is intermittent. The
fault indications also reset with a power cycle to the unit. Note: transitioning the MFD to
configuration mode will not reset the fault indications.
STATUS FAULT FAULT INDICATION CORRECTIVE ACTION
INDICATOR INDICATION DESCRIPTION
BOX
ELECTRICAL Voltages within the unit are  Cycle unit twice to confirm
out of range. problem.
 Replace the GWX if
condition remains.
400Hz Attitude input is not valid if  N/A for G3000s, this box
using the 400hz input. A should always be checked
valid 400Hz attitude signal green.
must be received then lost  If problem persists, replace
to set this box to red in the the GWX.
current power cycle.
HIGH VOLT Monitoring for >33V at the  Check voltage at input of
power input to the GWX. unit (should be <33V). If
Transitions unit to standby over 33V, troubleshoot
mode if over 33V. aircraft power system.
 Check if condition occurred
due to aircraft system power
spike due to other non-
G3000 electrical equipment
loads.
 Correct issues that cause
aircraft electrical system
power spikes.
 If problem persists, replace
the GWX
 Cycle power on unit only to
see if fault remains, if it
does, replace the GWX.
AFC Automatic frequency If problem persists, replace the
control within the unit has a GWX.
fault, will make unit enter
Standby mode.

190-01597-00 Revision D
BOX
TEMP Unit temp >85C.  If condition occurred during
flight, replace the GWX.
 If condition occurs on the
ground due to excessive heat
inside the radome, turn unit
off and allow it to cool
before further use.
 If the condition occurs on
the ground and the
temperature is normal in the
radome, replace the GWX.
RX TX Magnetron fault within the  Ensure latest GWX software
unit, will make unit enter version is installed.
standby mode.  If problem persists, replace
the GWX.

Revision D 190-01597-00
BOX
CAL Bad factory calibration data. Replace the GWX.
CONFIG Troubleshoot per GWX config
GWX and GDU
message in the Advisory Message
configuration do not match.
table.
EEPROM Internal EEPROM
Replace the GWX.
component failed.
RAM Internal RAM component
Replace the GWX.
failed.
FPGA Internal FPGA component
Replace the GWX.
failed.
ATTITUDE  Check the AHRS source for
The unit does not have a proper operation (refer to
valid attitude source via AHRS section or
A429 databus or 400Hz manufacturer’s manual).
input.  If problem persists, replace
the GWX.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Miscellaneous Radar Faults
Problem Possible Cause Resolution
Radar audibly noisy during Excessive gear train noise or Remove radome.
ground operation. radome interference 1. Inspect interior surfaces of
the radome for contact with
the radar dish. Correct
interference by adjusting or
replacing radome.
2. If no radome interference is
found, perform the
following:
3. Turn on the G3000.
4. Select the radar page on the
MFD.
5. Press the following softkeys
in the following order: 7, 9,
9, 7.
6. Press the MODE softkey
7. Press the TEST softkey. The
radar dish will begin
scanning, but it will not be
transmitting.
8. Test the horizontal and
vertical modes to exercise the
gear train and evaluate for
noise.
9. Replace the GWX if the
gears are excessively noisy.
Radar fails to make a full vertical Radome Interference or GWX 1. Remove the radome and
or horizontal sweep on the failure inspect interior surfaces for
screen. contact with the radar dish.
Correct interference by
adjusting or replacing the
radome.
2. If problem persists, replace
the GWX.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GTS Configuration Page
Data
The GTS Configuration page displays the following data:
GTS fault flags (a positive indicator showing no fault, a negative indicator showing fault, an unknown
indicator showing unknown fault status)
• Calibration
• Configuration
• FPGA
• ROM
• Execution
• Electrical
• Whisper Shout
• Transmit Power
• 1030 MHz
• 1090 MHz
• PA/LNA
• Receiver
• Transmitter
• Baro Altitude
• Temperature
• TCAS Equip Timeout
190-01597-00 Revision D
• Radio Altitude
GTS Status
• A text field showing selected GTS unit type
• A text field showing temperature (Celsius degrees with 0.1 Celsius degree precision)
• A text field showing radio altitude availability
• A button for the GTS audio test
• A button for the GTS self-test
• A text field labeled "DATA LOG ENABLED" if the GTS data log is enabled
Configuration
• Set and active top antenna
• Set and active top antennal cable loss (decibels with 0.1 decibel precision)
• Set and active bottom antenna
• Set and active bottom antenna cable loss (decibels with 0.1 decibel precision)
• Set and active mode s address
• Set and active volume (decibels with 0.5 decibel precision)
• Set and active voice
• Set and active ADS-B TX
• Set and active landing gear
Operations
The GTS Configuration page allows the following operations:
• Copy set information to active information by pressing the Enter key or SET>ACTV softkey.
• Copy active information to set information by pressing the ACTV>SET softkey.
• Modify top antenna by choosing one of the following antenna types using the FMS knob:
o Garmin GA58
o Sensor systems
o Modify top antenna cable loss using FMS knob.
o Modify bottom antenna by choosing one of the following antenna types using the FMS knob:
• None
• Monopole
• Garmin GA58
• Sensor systems
Modify bottom antenna cable loss using FMS knob
Modify volume using FMS knob
Modify voice by choosing one of the following options using FMS knob:
• Male
• Female
Modify ADS-B TX by choosing one of the following options using FMS knob:
• Installed

Revision D 190-01597-00
• Not Installed
Modify landing gear by choosing one of the following gear types using FMS knob:
• Fixed
• Retractable
• Test GTS audio system by pressing "Audio Test" button.
• Test GTS TCAS test mode by pressing "Run Self-Test" button.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.7 COMMON G3000 ISSUES AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
This section lists some common issues and suggested corrective actions.
4.7.1 GDU
Display and/or Keyboard Will Not Track Photocell
1. If you suspect the settings were manually changed by an operator, reload PFD1/2, MFD, GCU
and GMC Configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list PFD1/2
and MFD on the System Upload page.
2. For displays, go to the GDU TEST page in configuration mode. Cover and uncover the
photocells and verify that PHOTOCELL A or PHOTOCELL B value changes. If values do not
change, replace the display.
3. Reload GDU configuration files.

Display/Keyboard Will Not Track Dimmer Bus
1. If you suspect the settings were manually changed by an operator, reload PFD1/2, MFD, GCU
and GMC Configuration files including optional equipment configuration files that list PFD1/2
and MFD on the System Upload page.
2. Reload GDU configuration files.
3. If display is a PFD, swap PFD1 and PFD2 to see if problem remains with display. Replace
display if condition remains with the same unit.
4. If condition remains in original position after swapping displays, check display dimmer input to
verify voltage is present (disconnect the unit and check pin 59 in the wire harness connector for a
voltage.)
5. If display is the MFD, check dimmer input to verify voltage is present.
6. Replace MFD if dimmer voltage is present.
Display is Blank, Resets, Or Flickers
1. Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone technology is not turned on (even in a
monitoring state) in the cabin.
2. Cycle power. If GDU recovers, observe display for yellow text containing error information at
the top of the screen. If message indicates software need to be reloaded, then reload software.
Otherwise, replace the GDU.
3. Use a bright light to verify LCD is active.
4. Adjust avionics dimmer control full clockwise.
5. Manually turn up backlight on PFD1 and load configuration files to the GDU.
6. Ensure slide lock is fully engaged with the locking tabs on the back of the unit. If slide lock is
not fully engaged, remove connector and verify the locking tabs on the GDU are perpendicular to
the connector. If necessary, straighten them before reseating connector.
7. Ensure GDU is receiving power and ground. If a circuit breaker is tripped, determine source of
short before resetting breaker.
8. Ensure circuit breakers have not failed and power wire connections are secure. Swap PFD1 and
PFD2. If problem follows unit, replace the display. Note the position it failed in (PFD1/2). If
problem does not follow unit, troubleshoot aircraft wiring for fault.

Revision D 190-01597-00
SD Card is Stuck In GDU
1. DO NOT insert a screwdriver of any length into the card slot.
2. DO NOT pry against the overlay.
3. DO NOT force the SD Card out.
4. Use a small screwdriver in the groove on the side of the exposed end of the card to help pull out
the card.
5. You may need to push the card in further to release the card locking mechanism.
6. If the card can be removed, check the SD card for more than one label. Two or more labels on
the card will cause sticking.
7. Remove all but one label.
8. Ensure the SD card is from SanDisk. Use of other SD Cards is not approved.
9. If card was inserted with the label facing to the right, do not attempt to remove. Return the unit
to Garmin for repair.
A Button/Knob/Joystick Does Not Appear to Function
1. Go to the GDU TEST page in configuration mode and verify button, knob, or joystick operates
correctly by observing a change in color from red to green in the button/knob/joystick icon when
the button/knob/joystick is pressed. If a button is stuck, the button icon will be green without
pressing the button as soon as you turn to the GDU TEST page.
2. If problem is verified, replace GDU.
Terrain/Obstacle/SafeTaxi Does Not Display
1. Check for any Database Error Messages. Correct any before proceeding.
2. Ensure supplemental data cards are inserted correctly in the lower slots of all three GDU’s.
3. Allow the system to verify the data on the cards for approximately five minutes after power-up.
4. If a database does not activate, reload the problem database onto the SD Card or replace the card.
You may need to replace all data cards as a set to keep the database cycles the same and prevent
database mismatch errors.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.7.2 GIA
Weak COM Transmit Power
1. Swap GIA1 and GIA2, reconfigure both GIA’s to their new locations to verify if the unit or
aircraft wiring is the problem.
2. If problem follows unit, replace GIA.
3. If problem does not follow unit, check COM antenna and cabling for faults.
Weak COM Receiver
3. If problem does not follow unit, check COM antenna and cabling for faults.
No COM Sidetone
3. If problem persists, replace GMA #1 with a known good unit.
4. If problem persists, reinstall original GMA #1 and replace GMA #2.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.7.3 WAAS GPS
G3000 Does Not Acquire Satellites
Background Information/GPS Receiver Operation
Each GIA Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS 1 for the #1 IAU or GPS 2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the GPS 1 or GPS 2 Status Pane
and the GPS Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (refer to Figure 4-7).
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite
Based Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne,
turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If the sensor
annunciation persists, check for a system failure message by touching the MSG Button on Touchscreen
Controller. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Screen and compare the information for GPS 1
and GPS 2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Figure 4-7. GPS Receiver Information
Selecting the GPS receiver:

1. From the Home, touch Utilities > GPS Status.
2. Touch the GPS1 button to select the #1 GPS receiver. The button annunciator is green when enabled,
gray when disabled. The system displays the GPS1 STATUS Pane.
3. Touch the GPS 2 button to select the #2 GPS receiver. The button annunciator will be green when
selected on.
4. The system displays the GPS2 STATUS Pane.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Satellite Constellation Diagram
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
Satellite Signal Status
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of
Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS Receiver Status
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS 1 or GPS 2) is shown in the lower right of the GPS 1 and GPS 2 Status Pane. When the
receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital
data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that
should be in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been
acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS 1 and GPS 2 Status Panes can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to
poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for
WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal
bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
Possible Solutions:

Revision D 190-01597-00
2. Check for possible external interference to the GPS receivers by selecting GPS status page on the
GTC and check the GPS strength bars on both GPS receivers. If the signal strength level is
erratic, or they disappear and reappear rapidly, or switch between a solid and hollow bar
frequently there is an external device interfering with the GPS receivers. Turn off any devices
that radiate a signal in the local area or move the aircraft to another location to remove the
interference.
3. Check date and time on Date/Time Setup Page. If date and time are incorrect, enter the correct
date and time.
4. Swap GIA1 and GIA2, to verify location of problem. If problem follows unit, clear the GPS
almanac by performing the following steps:
• Select the GIA RS-232/ARNIC 429 Config Page. At the top of the screen, select the GIA
that cannot acquire satellites (GIA1 or GIA2) and press the ENT key.
• Press the “CLR NV” softkey at the bottom of the screen.
• Select “OK” in the “Clear GIA nonvolatile memory?” pop-up window.
• Reload GIA Audio and Config files. Be sure to reload the config files for any optional
equipment installed on the aircraft that require the GIA config to be updated.
• Cycle power on the system and allow it to restart in normal mode. Place the aircraft outside
and allow 15-30 minutes for the GPS to acquire a position and download a new almanac.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5. If clearing nonvolatile memory is unsuccessful and the GPS still cannot acquire a position,
replace the GIA.
6. If problem does not follow unit, replace the GIA.
7. Check GPS antenna and cabling.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.7.4 NAV
Weak NAV Receiver
1. Set up a NAV/COM Ramp Test Set to radiate a test signal.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location of problem.
4. If problem does not follow unit, check NAV antenna, coupler, and cabling for faults.
Weak G/S Receiver
1. Set up a NAV/COM Ramp Test Set to radiate a test signal.
2. Swap GIA1 and GIA2 to verify location of problem.
4. If problem does not follow unit, check NAV antenna, coupler, and cabling for faults.
4.7.5 GDC ADC
Altitude is Different Than Standby Altimeter
1. Perform a pitot/static check (see OEM maintenance manual for procedure). Allow the GDC to
warm up for fifteen minutes before checking accuracy.
2. Determine which instrument is outside limits and recalibrate or replace. Note: Both units may
individually be in spec but show a difference in altitude. Do not return a GDC to Garmin for
service if not outside limits.
3. If GDC is outside limits, recalibration may be performed.
4. GDC Config file does not load.
5. Replace GDC config module.
6. If problem persists, replace GDC config module wire harness.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.7.6 GRS AHRS
AHRS Does Not Complete Initialization
2. Ensure GPS has acquired at least four satellites, has a 3D navigation solution, and a DOP of less
than 5.0. This is particularly important if this issue appears during ground operation only.
3. If the message ‘Calibrate AHRS/Mag’ is present, perform the GRS/GMU Calibration.
4. Check GRS configuration module wiring for damage.
5. Check GRS connector for bent pins. If no damage can be found, replace GRS configuration
module.
6. If problem persists, replace the GRS.
Attitude Appears Unstable
2. Ensure the four GRS mounting screws are tight. Finger tight is not sufficient, a screwdriver must
be used to verify.
3. Ensure mounting rack and airframe shelf are secure and all hardware and brackets are present
(CAUTION - do not loosen the mounting rack hardware to the airframe shelf or the aircraft will
need to be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL OFFSET procedure performed).
4. Ensure GRS connector is securely fastened and proper strain relief is provided.
5. Remove GRS connector and verify there are no bent pins.
6. Replace the GRS.
7. Contact Garmin for further troubleshooting if required.
GRS Calibration Message
Figure 4-8. Calibrate AHRS/MAG Message

‘The external installation configuration parameters are not considered calibrated’
These parameters are categorized into two sets: AHRS installation, and magnetic installation parameters. If
any one of the two is “NOT CALIBRATED”, the GRS heading, pitch, and roll may all be flagged as invalid
or a message displayed (as shown). Perform the required post-installation calibration procedures. If the
calibration is unsuccessful, the GRS configuration module may require replacement as it stores the
calibration information.

Revision D 190-01597-00
GRS Operational Modes
The GRS is capable of initializing and outputting valid data without any external inputs as long as there is
sufficient straight and level flight. Heading requires a valid input from a magnetometer unless the unit is in
DG mode, in which case the heading is set manually by the pilot. The table below describes the pitch and roll
limits for the GRS to initialize. One condition not described in the table, is that the aircraft must fly straight
and level to initialize in Classical, No-Magnetometer and DG modes if air-data isn’t available. Also it takes
3 to 5 minutes for the DG mode to initialize.
Attitude- Sensor Inputs Available & Reliable AHRS Outputs Valid

Solution Mode 1
Inertials Mag Air Data GPS Hdg Pitch Roll Ang Accels
Rates
Primary YES YES Not Used YES YES YES YES YES YES
Classical YES YES Used, Not NO YES YES YES YES YES
Required2
No- YES NO Used, Not Used, Not NO YES YES YES YES
Magnetometer Required2 Required3
DG Heading YES NO Used, Not Used, Not YES4 YES YES YES YES
mode (Pilot Required2 Required3
selectable)
Notes:
1. “Inertial” sensors means all three axes of angular rate sensors, and three axes of accelerometers.
2. Air data information is not required in Classical or No-Magnetometer modes, however if it is
available it will be used during periods of extended acceleration/deceleration or extended turning
maneuvers. The performance may be degraded if air-data isn’t available.
3. GPS information is not required in No-Magnetometer and DG Heading modes, but if it is available it
will be used to determine if in a low-acceleration state.
4. During DG mode operation, heading output is based on periodic pilot input of heading information.
GRS Bank and Pitch limits for In-flight Initialization
Attitude-Solution Mode Bank Pitch
Entered Following Limit Limit
Initialization (deg) (deg)
Primary Mode ±20.0 ±5.0

Other Modes ±10.0 ±5.0

190-01597-00 Revision D
GRS Troubleshooting Questions
If possible, ask the operator the following questions to help the technician gather the information to
accurately troubleshoot the GRS operation.
1. What specifically was the nature of the failure? Was it a red-X of only heading, only pitch/roll, or
both?
2. If there was a red-X of pitch or roll information, did the PFD display the "AHRS Align: Keep Wings
Level" message which is indicative of an AHRS reset?
Figure 4-9. Attitude Fail Indication
Figure 4-10. AHRS Align Message

3. What exactly was the aircraft doing in the two minutes that preceded the failure (taxing on the
ground, flying straight-and-level flight, turning, climbing, etc)? If the problem occurred on the
ground, was in within 100 feet of a hanger using GPS repeaters?
4. How long did the failure last? Was it brief or sustained? Was it repetitive in nature? If it was
repetitive, about how many times did it happen? Did it happen on more than one day?
5. Was the problem correlated with a specific maneuver or a specific geographic area?
6. Can the problem be repeated reliably?
7. Were any of system messages relating to AHRS observed within an hour of the occurrence of the
problem?
8. Did the onset of the problem occur shortly after a software upload to one or more G3000 LRU, or
shortly after a repeat of the magnetometer calibration procedure?
9. Was a cell phone on in the aircraft at the time?
10. Were there any GPS messages or loss of position lock?

Revision D 190-01597-00
GRS Aircraft Troubleshooting
1. Review the airframe logbook. See if any G3000, other avionics or electrical maintenance had been
performed recently.
2. Check power wire connections at the circuit breakers and check for intermittent circuit breakers.
3. Have ground power put on the aircraft.
4. Turn on G3000 and record the system software level. This will be needed if assistance from Garmin
Product Support is required.
5. After the G3000 system has initialized (about one minute from power on), note any red-x’s on the
displays or system messages.
6. Try to verify the issue still exists before proceeding to the physical inspection below:
• Turn off G3000 and gain access to the GRS.
• Inspect the physical installation of the GRS.
• Is the connector tight and locking slider engaged to the locking tabs on each side of the GRS
connector?
• Is the wire harness loose and able to move around during flight? This condition may cause the
wire to pull on or vibrate the connector making intermittent connections.
• Is the GRS mounted tight to the rack? If any doubt exists, use a screwdriver to check the
tightness of the four mounting screws.
• Look around the GRS for any heavy objects that may not be fastened tight to the structure that
could induce GRS vibration.
• Look for evidence of water or fluid contamination in the area around the GRS.
• Unplug the GRS connector and check for bent pins.
• Inspect the wire harness clamp on the rear of the connector to verify it’s not too tight and
damaging wires. Also check for some sort of protective wire wrap between the wires and the
clamp. If the wire clamp is installed upside down, it has sharp edges that can cut into the wires.
• Verify the locking slider spring is strong enough to keep the slider in the locked position by
cycling the slider.
• Ensure that a cell phone or a device using cell phone technology is not turned on (even in a
• Ensure metal objects (tool boxes, power carts, etc.) are not interfering with the magnetometer
and aircraft is not in hangar, near other buildings, parked over metal drainage culverts or on hard
surfaces that may contain steel reinforcements
• Check for software or failed data path error messages. Correct any errors before proceeding.
• Ensure GRS unit connecter is secure and proper wire harness strain relief is provided.
• Ensure the GRS is fastened down tightly in its mounting rack and that the mounting rack is not
loose (CAUTION - do not loosen the mounting rack hardware to the airframe shelf or the aircraft
will need to be re-leveled and the PITCH/ROLL OFFSET procedure performed).
• Cycle GRS power to restart initialization.
• Ensure GPS has acquired at least four satellites, has a 3D navigation solution, and a DOP of less
than 5.0. This is particularly important for an ATTITUDE FAIL that appears during ground
operation only.
• Perform an Engine Run-Up Test to check if engine vibration is causing the GRS to invalidate
outputs or reset.

190-01597-00 Revision D
• Perform the Magnetic Interference Test to determine if there is significant magnetic interference
from some device on the aircraft.
• Replace the GRS.
• If problem persists, replace the GRS configuration module.
• If the condition is not resolved by following these instructions, contact Garmin Product Support
for additional assistance. In rare cases, a Garmin Field Service Engineer may need to visit your
facility to retrieve the fault logs stored in the GRS to determine if the fault is in the GRS or the
aircraft.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.7.7 GMA
Noise in Audio
1. Most often the cause of the noise is external to the GMA. Try the following to locate the source
of the noise before replacing the GMA.
2. Try a different pair of headsets. Noise cancelling headsets may pick up and/or generate more
noise than standard headsets from their own circuitry.
3. Check for noise with engines turned off.
4. If the noise is present only when the engines are running, check the generator and/or ignition
system as possible sources of noise (see OEM maintenance manual).
5. Check for noise as all electrical equipment is turned on and off (strobes, other radios, etc.).
6. If the noise is identified from one electrical system or component refer to the OEM maintenance
manual.
7. Ensure the NAV/COM squelch is not open.
8. Ensure the ADF and DME audio is not active.
9. Ensure the marker beacon audio is not active.
10. Ensure the ICS squelch is not open. Master squelch level can be adjusted on the GMA
CONFIGURATION page for higher noise environments.
11. Replace unit only after all possible external sources of noise are eliminated.
Buttons Do Not Work
1. Some buttons are disabled in the GMA CONFIGURATION setup by default. This is to remove
potential sources of audio noise for inputs that are not used. If in doubt as to which buttons
should be disabled, reload GMA config files and other config files for optional equipment
installed in the aircraft (i.e. ADF, HF, etc.).
Speaker Cuts Out
1. Reduce volume level of the item that caused the speaker to cut out when turned up. A speaker
protection circuit disables the speaker output if the volume is too high. If the volume is not
sufficient, replace aircraft cabin speaker, reference the OEM Maintenance Manual.
2. Mic Audio Heard in Speaker
3. Reduce ICS Volume.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.7.8 XM
No XM Audio is Heard
• Ensure the following items are not preventing XM audio from being audible:
• Verify the XM volume is not muted on the Audio & Radios page on the GTC.
• Verify the COM squelch is not open.
• Verify the ICS squelch is not open.
• Verify the marker beacon tones are not being received.
• Verify the headphone (if equipped) volume is turned up.
No XM Weather data is present
• Go to the SETUP – AVIONICS STATUS page on the GTC and ensure unit is online as indicated by
green .
• If a red X is present, verify the unit is receiving power at the rack connector.
• Ensure there are no GDL alerts in the messages window on the GTC. If there is an Alert for software
or configuration error or mismatch, reload the file noted in the Alert.
• Select SETTINGS and XM INFORMATION on GTC and verify the following:
• Signal strength indicated as STRONG. If strength is WEAK or NO SIGNAL, verify connection with
GDL 69 antenna and unit.
• Verify there is a good ground connection through the aircraft between the system rack and the
GDL/69A unit. Reference the Aircraft Maintenance Manual for instructions on how to check
bonding and ground points.
• If problem(s) persists, replace the GDL 69/69A.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.8 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (AFCS) TROUBLESHOOTING
The G3000 AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the System
avionics architecture. G3000 AFCS functionality in the aircraft is distributed across the following LRUs:
• GDU Primary Flight Displays
• GIA Integrated Avionics Units
• GMC AFCS Control Unit
• GSA AFCS Servos
• GTA Pitch Trim Adapters
• GSM Servo Mounts
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. In DG Mode, the magnetometer data is replaced by a heading value set by the flight crew. If
either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data information for
attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure below) and depend upon the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is
communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.8.1 AFCS Status Annunciations
The annunciations listed in the following table x (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD
above the Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are
prioritized by criticality. The following table also includes recommended troubleshooting actions.
Figure 4-11. AFCS Status Annunciation

Revision D 190-01597-00
AFCS Annunciation Troubleshooting Table
Condition Annunciation Recommended Actions
Pitch Failure
 Check the Avionics Status Page on the GTC page to see if the servo is
Roll Failure online (green check).
 Check that the affected servo is receiving power.
MET Switch  Check the servo wiring and connector.
Stuck, or Pitch  Ensure PTRM switches are not stuck.
Trim Axis  If failure condition still exists, remove and replace the affected servo.
Control Failure
 Check that no red X’s are present on the MFD, PFDs, and GTCs.
 Check that there are no Alert Messages present in the PFD Alert
window. Correct any software or configuration errors noted.
 Go to the Avionics Status Page on the GTC and verify that all LRUs
AFCS System
have a ‘green’ check.
Failure
 Download GIA fault logs per Section x and review for failure
information.
 If the OAT and TAS is Red-X’d and the attitude indication is present,
troubleshoot per Section x.
Elevator Mistrim  If mistrim annunciations persist, check the Pitch Trim servo for proper
Up operation. Verify that the servo is online at the Avionics Status Page on
the GTC.
 Check the Pitch Trim servo wiring and connector. Ensure the servo is
Elevator Mistrim receiving power.
Down  Check the aircraft trim control rigging.
 If mistrim condition still exists, remove and replace the affected servo.
Aileron Mistrim
Left  Check for possible fuel imbalance.
 Check aileron control rigging.
Aileron Mistrim  If mistrim condition still exists remove and replace the roll servo.
Right
 Reset system power.

 Allow the system to complete pre-flight tests. The preflight test should
Preflight Test finish within 2 minutes. If it does not pass, the red ‘PFT’ annunciation
is shown. In case of PFT failure, troubleshoot in the same manner as
for the red ‘AFCS’ annunciation.

190-01597-00 Revision D
4.9 ASSERT (DIAGNOSTIC) LOGS
If additional assistance is needed in troubleshooting LRU faults, assert logs for selected LRUs can be
downloaded to an SD card as encrypted files and emailed to Garmin Aviation Product Support for
evaluation. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support before sending a log to prevent any delay in response.
NOTE
The following procedure requires the aircraft to be on the ground.
Downloading G3000 Assert Logs:

1. Place an SD card into the top slot of the PFD.
2. Start the G3000 in configuration mode.
3. Select the System Status Page.
4. Enable the cursor by pressing the PFD knob, select the desired LRU in the LRU list, and press the
ENT key.
5. Press the ‘DNLD LOG’ softkey (Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-12. DNLD (Download) Softkey
6. Monitor the Assert Log Download Box.
Figure 4-13. Downloading Complete
7. Press the ENT key when the box shows 100% (Figure 4-13).
8. Repeat for any additional LRUs which require data.
9. Power down the G3000 and remove the SD card.
10. Insert the assert log as an attachment to an email and include the LRU download order. Send to
Garmin Aviation Product Support at avionics@Garmin.com.

Revision D 190-01597-00
4.10 LRU External Connector Information
External connector information for each LRU such as pin numbers, pin names and descriptions is contained
in Appendix A. This maintenance manual contains no system interconnection pin information.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Blank Page

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 5—LRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
This section contains basic procedures for removing and installing G3000 LRUs. Garmin LRU installation
manual part numbers are given in each section for technician reference. This section is not a substitute for an
approved OEM maintenance manual, installation design drawing, or complete installation data package.
NOTE
Once an LRU is replaced, a software loading and testing may be required. See Section 6 for
software loading, configuring, and testing procedures for a replacement LRU.
Always ensure that aircraft power is off when removing and/or replacing an LRU. Unplug any auxiliary power
supplies. Before performing maintenance, the technician needs to verify that LRU software part numbers and
version numbers match the software configuration listed in the general arrangement drawing. The Avionics Status
Page on the GTC can also be used to check part numbers and versions (Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1. LRU Information

The LRU Info Tab on the Avionics Status screen displays the status, serial numbers, and software version
numbers for all detected system LRUs. The system displays a green checked box for each active LRUs. A
yellow ‘X’ box indicates a failed LRU. Inform a service center or Garmin dealer a LRU has failed.
Viewing LRU information:
1. From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2. If necessary, touch the LRU Info tab.
3. Scroll as needed and touch a LRU button to display a pop-up window with additional information for the
selected LRU.
4. When finished, touch the pop-up window (if displayed), or touch Back or Home.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5.1 GCU PFD CONTROLLER
Garmin Installation Manual Part Number: 190-00303-75
The GCU uses captive screws and does not have alignment marks.
Removal:
1. Turn each of the four locking sockets ¼ turn counter-clockwise using a 3/32” hex drive tool and remove
the controller from the instrument panel.
Installation:
1. Hold the unit flush with the instrument panel.
2. Orient the locking studs with the alignment marks in the vertical position.
3. Turn each of the four locking sockets ¼ turn clockwise using a 3/32” hex drive tool until tight (20 ±2 in-
lbs). The alignment marks are in the horizontal position when locked.
5.2 GDC AIR DATA COMPUTER

Refer to Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2. GDC Installation

Removal:
1. Pull back on the lockdown mechanism and simultaneously turn counterclockwise until free.
2. Disengage the lockdown mechanism collar from the GDC hook and slide the GDC forward to remove
from the mounting rack.
Revision D 190-01597-00
Installation:
1. Place the unit on the mounting rack, ensuring the GDC rear feet are aligned in the mounting rack slots.
2. Slide the GDC back until the feet are fully engaged with the mounting rack.
3. Lift the lockdown mechanism collar in place on the GDC hook and hand turn lockdown mechanism knob
clockwise until the GDC is secure.
5.3 GDL 59 WI-FI DATALINK AND FLIGHT PARAMETER RECORDER
Removal:
1. Unlock the GDL 59 using the lever-locking handle.
2. Remove the GDL 59 from the rack.
Installation:
1. Insert the GDL 59 into the rack, noting proper orientation. Do not use excessive force when inserting the
GDL 59 into the rack. This may cause damage to occur to the connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy
resistance is felt during installation, stop! Remove the GDL 59 and identify the source of resistance. The
rear plate is designed to float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by the
connector harness.
2. Fasten the handle to the GDL 59 body using the provided Phillips screw. Start the handle screw into the
hole carefully to avoid cross-threading. Do not apply torque in excess of 14 in-lbs to the handle screw.
The application of torque exceeding 14 in-lbs to this screw will damage the LRU case and/or retaining
hardware.
3. Lock the GDL 59 in place using the lever-locking handle.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5.4 GDL 69A XM WEATHER AND RADIO DATA LINK
Figure 5-3. GDL 69A Installation
Removal:
1. Loosen the Locking Lever Handle Securing Screw (4).
2. Raise the Locking Lever Handle (1).
3. Slide the unit out of the Mount Rack.
Installation:
The following steps are for the remote mounting rack which is illustrated in Figure 5-3. The steps are identical
for the modular rack.
1. Loosen and remove the Locking Lever Handle Securing Screw (4). Then, lift up on the end of the
Locking Lever Handle (1).
2. Slide the GDL 69/69A unit into the Mount Rack carefully fitting the Locking Lever Handle Cam Head
(2) into the slot of the Locking Plate (3) of the Mount Rack.
3. After fully inserting the unit into the mount rack, visually note that the Cam Head (2) remains seated in
the slot of the Locking Plate (3).

Revision D 190-01597-00
4. When inserting the GDL 69/69A into the Remote Mount Rack, it may be possible for the Pivot Pin (2) to
fit between the unit and the mount rack without going into the slot of the Locking Plate (3). If the Cam
Head (2) does not seat in the slot of the Locking Plate (3), the unit will not firmly engage with the mount
rack and the unit could come loose from the rack.
5. With the unit firmly engaged with the mount rack, lower the Locking Lever Handle (1). Then, insert and
tighten the Locking Lever Handle Securing Screw (4) to mechanically secure the unit to the Mount Rack.
5.5 GDU DISPLAY UNIT
Removal:
1. Turn each of the four fasteners counter-clockwise using a 3/32” hex drive tool.
2. Remove the display from the instrument panel.
Installation:
1. The GDU is installed by holding the unit flush with the instrument panel.
2. The pawl-latches should be fully retracted, in the horizontal position, so as to not interfere with the panel
opening.
3. A 3/32” hex drive tool is then used to turn each of the four fasteners clockwise until tightened to the
proper torque (20 in-lbs).
4. When tightened, the pawl-latches are in the vertical position.
5.6 GEA ENGINE AND AIRFRAME INTERFACE UNIT
Removal:
1. Unlock the GEA using the lever-locking handle.
2. Remove the unit from the rack.
Installation:
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GEA into the rack. This may cause damage to
occur to the connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt during installation, stop!
Remove the GEA and identify the source of resistance. The rear plate is designed to float in the
unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by the connector harness.
1. Insert the GEA into the rack, noting proper orientation.
CAUTION
Start the handle screw into the hole carefully, to avoid cross-threading. Do not apply torque in
excess of 14 in-lbs to the handle screw. The application of torque exceeding 14 in-lbs to this
screw will damage the LRU case and/or retaining hardware.
2. Lock the GEA in place using the lever-locking handle. Fasten the handle to the GEA body using the
provided Phillips screw.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5.7 GIA INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT
Removal:
1. Loosen the Phillips screw (or pull on the D-Ring and twist counter-clockwise 90°, for units with a D-
Ring).
2. Unlock the handle and remove the unit from the rack.
Installation:
1. Carefully slide the GIA into the rack. Ensure that the orientation of the unit allows for the engagement of
the locking stud in the channel on the rack. The unit can only be installed in one direction.
2. Push the GIA lever down towards the bottom of the unit. This engages the locking stud with the dogleg
slot and locks unit into the rack. If there is excessive resistance, do not force the unit.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GIA 63(W) into the rack. This may cause damage
to the connectors, unit and/or unit rack. If excessive resistance is felt during installation, stop!
Remove the GIA 63(W) and identify the source of resistance. The rear plates are designed to
float in the unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plates are not bound by the connectors or spring
clip.
NOTE
The install screw is designed with a ratcheting socket that resists turning counterclockwise, unless
pushed in. This ensures that the engagement screw cannot loosen under vibration.
3. Lock the handle into the GIA body and tighten the Phillips screw (or push in the D-Ring and twist
clockwise 90°, for units with a D-Ring).
5.8 GMA AUDIO PROCESSOR AND MARKER BEACON RECEIVER

Removal:
1. Loosen the Phillips screw and unlock the GMA.
2. Remove the GMA from the rack.
Installation:
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GMA into the rack. This may damage the
connectors, unit, and/or unit rack. If heavy resistance is felt during installation, stop! Remove
the GMA and identify the source of resistance.
1. Insert the GMA into the rack, noting proper orientation.
2. Lock the GMA and tighten the Phillips screw.

Revision D 190-01597-00
5.9 GMC AUTOPILOT MODE CONTROLLER
Removal:
1. Turn each of the four locking sockets ¼ turn counter-clockwise using a 3/32" hex drive tool.
2. Remove the unit from the instrument panel.
Installation:
1. Hold the unit flush with the instrument panel. The locking studs should be orientated with the alignment
marks in the vertical position.
2. Turn each of the four locking sockets ¼ turn clockwise using a 3/32" hex drive tool. The alignment marks
are in the horizontal position when locked.
5.10 GRS AHRS AND GMU MAGNETOMETER
NOTE
When mounting the GRS rack to the airframe, and the unit to the rack, it is important to ensure
that lockdown mechanisms are tight for proper unit operation.
To install the GRS (refer to Figure 5-4):
1. Place the unit on the mounting rack.
2. Slide the GRS back until the feet are fully engaged with the mounting rack.
3. Lift the lockdown mechanism collars in place on the GRS hooks and hand turn lockdown mechanism
knobs clockwise until the GRS is secure.
To disengage the GRS (refer to Figure 5-4):
1. Pull back on the lockdown mechanisms and simultaneously turn counterclockwise until free.
2. Disengage the lockdown mechanism collars from the GRS hooks and slide the GRS forward to remove
from the mounting rack.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Figure 5-4. GRS Mounting
Mounting the GMU

Mount the GMU to its mounting plate, taking care to tighten the mounting screws firmly. The metal components
in the GMUs connector may slightly affect the magnetic field sensed by the GMU.
Place the connector at least 2 inches from the body of the GMU to minimize this effect. After attaching the GMUs
connector to its mate in the aircraft wiring, secure the connector in place using good installation practices. This
will ensure that any remaining magnetic effect can be compensated for.
If the GMU is ever removed, the anti-rotation properties of the mounting screws must be restored. This
may be done by replacing the screws with new Garmin PN 211-60037-08. If original screws must be re-used, coat
screw threads with Loctite 242 (blue) thread-locking compound, Garmin PN 291-00023-02, or equivalent.
Important: Mounting screws must be brass.
NOTE
The GMU must be mounted such that the pitch offset relative to the GRS mounting is less than
6.0 degrees. Likewise, the roll offset of the GMU mounting relative to the GRS mounting should
also be less than 6.0 degrees. Failure to meet these specifications may result in a failed
magnetometer calibration.

Revision D 190-01597-00
5.11 GSA SERVO ACTUATOR/GSM SERVO GEARBOX
CAUTION
The information in this section is provided as guidance, and does not take precedence over
installation procedures defined in aircraft-specific installation data.
Removal:
To remove the GSA/GSM reverse the installation steps.
Installation:
1. Fasten the GSM to the structural bracket per the aircraft manufacturer specifications. Mounting hardware
to be provided by the installing agency.
2. Attach the aircraft control surface cabling/chains to the output pulley or sprocket following guidance
provided in aircraft manufacturer specifications.
3. On some capstans, the center ball may snap into place. Always ensure the ball is fully seated in the
capstan.
4. Assemble the cable guards. Refer to aircraft-specific installation documentation for the proper location of
the cable guards. Use the recommended screws and washers to install the cable guards.
5. Carefully mate the GSA with the GSM. Fasten the GSA to the GSM per the aircraft manufacturer
specifications. Mounting hardware to be provided by the installing agency.
6. Connect the GSA connector to the aircraft harness. Make sure that the harness is properly secured to the
airframe.
5.12 GSC SIGNAL CONDITIONER
Removal:
1. Disconnect power and data cable from the unit.
2. Remove four machine screws attaching unit to mounting tray.
3. Remove the unit.
Installation:
1. Attach unit to mounting tray using four machine screws.
2. Connect power and data cable from the unit.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5.13 GSD DATA CONCENTRATOR
Removal:
• Unlock the GSD using the lever-locking handle.
Remove the unit from the rack.
Installation:
1. Insert the GSD into the rack, noting proper orientation.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GSD into the rack. This may cause damage to
Remove the GSD and identify the source of resistance. The rear plate is designed to float in the
unit rack. Check to ensure the rear plate is not bound by the connector harness.
CAUTION
Start the handle screw into the hole carefully, to avoid cross-threading. Do not apply torque in
excess of 14 in-lbs to the handle screw. The application of torque exceeding 14 in-lbs to this
screw will damage the LRU case and/or retaining hardware.
2. Lock the GSD in place using the lever-locking handle. Carefully start the handle screw into the hole to
avoid cross threading.
5.14 GSR IRIDIUM SATELLITE TRANSCEIVER
Removal:
1. Unlock the GSR using the ratcheting latch mechanism.
Installation:
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when inserting the GSR into the rack. This may cause damage to
Remove the GSR and identify the source of resistance.
1. Insert the GSR into the rack, noting proper orientation
2. Lock the GSR in place using the ratcheting latch mechanism.
5.15 GTA TRIM ADAPTOR
Removal:
1. Mount the GTA to the airframe using at least 6 or 10 screws.
2. Use cable ties to secure the cable assemblies to provide strain relief.
3. After the cable assemblies are made and wiring installed to the unit, route the wiring bundle as
appropriate.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Installation:
1. Use typical #8 mounting hardware to fasten the GTA to the airframe. The installer may attach typical #8
blind nuts to the airframe to facilitate installation and removal or assemble the unit to the airframe using
#8 flat washers and #8-32 locknuts. The installer must provide any additional remote mounting
equipment. Ensure that the GTA chassis has a ground path to the airframe by having at least one
mounting screw in contact with the airframe.
2. After the cable assemblies are made and wiring installed to the unit, route the wiring bundle as
appropriate. Use cable ties to secure the cable assemblies to provide strain relief.
3. The GTA must be mounted using at least 6 screws, but may also be mounted using 10 screws.
5.16 GTC TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER
Removal:
1. Remove the four captive screws using a 3/32” hex drive tool.
2. Remove the GTC from the instrument panel.
Installation:
1. The GTC is installed by holding the unit flush with the instrument panel.
2. A 3/32” hex drive tool is then used to turn each of the four captive screws clockwise until tight (20 +/-2
in-lbs).
5.16.1 GTC 570 Fan Replacement Procedure
The GTC 570 has two cooling fans. If one or both of the fans fail, a “GTC FAN FAIL – GTC internal fan failure.
Unit needs service.” system message appears. GTC 570 cooling fan replacement and return to service procedure is
listed below:
Replacing the Cooling Fan Assembly
1. Remove the GTC 570.

2. Remove the cooling fan assembly from the GTC 570 chassis, by removing (and discarding) the three
screws that connect the cooling fan assembly to the GTC 570 chassis, as shown in the following figure.
NOTE
The Fan Assembly Kit may be ordered using part number K00-00797-00; Kit, GTC 570, Fan
Assembly Replacement, Enhanced. The enhanced GTC fan kit will not affect unit envelope
sizing.
NOTE
The enhanced GTC fan replacement kit does not affect current GTC envelope sizing.

190-01597-00 Revision D
3. Disconnect both fan connectors shown the figure below:
4. Connect the replacement fan assembly fan connectors, noting orientation and ensuring both connectors
are fully engaged.
5. Secure the replacement fan assembly to the GTC 570 chassis using the three provided screws. Torque
each screw to 9 ± 1 in-lbs.
6. Install the GTC 570 (loading software is not required).
7. Power the GTC 570 on in a heated hangar for 5-10 minutes (times may vary depending on temperature)
and verify the cooling fans turn on.
8. Verify that no fan system messages appear.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Visually Verifying the Cooling Fan Operation
1. Power the GTC 570 on in a heated hangar (15°C or greater) for 5-10 minutes, until the internal
temperature reaches approximately 30°C or greater (times may vary depending on temperature).
2. Visually verify the cooling fans turn on and no fan system messages appear.
3. Secure the GTC 570 to the aircraft panel by following the instructions in the OEM maintenance manual
(loading software is not required).
4. Perform all applicable post-installing and checkout procedures as documented in the applicable airframe
specific maintenance manual to verify successful replacement of the GTC 570.
5. Verifying the Cooling Fan Operation Using the GTC Status Page
Verifying the Cooling Fan Operation Using the GTC Status Page
1. Secure the GTC 570 to the aircraft panel by following the instructions in the applicable airframe specific
maintenance manual (loading software is not required).
2. While in a heated hangar (15°C or greater), hold down the dual concentric knob while applying power to
the GTC 570 to enter Configuration mode.
3. Press the Status menu button on the GTC to navigate to the GTC Status page:
4. Wait 5-10 minutes (times may vary depending on temperature), until the “Main Temp” reaches
approximately 30°C or greater.
5. Within one minute of “Main Temp” reaching 30°C or greater, verify both fan status boxes turn green.

190-01597-00 Revision D
5.17 GTS TCAS II PROCESSOR
CAUTION
After any maintenance or modification is made to the GTS cables such as replacing a connector
or entire cable, be sure to adhere to all of the specifications and limitations such as minimum and
maximum cable attenuation, attenuation balance between cables, phase matching etc.
Removal:
1. Disconnect the eight coax "quick-lock" connectors.
2. Disconnect the three electrical connectors.
3. Unlock the unit from the rack by loosening the ratcheting latch mechanism.
Installation:
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Insert the unit into the installation rack.
3. Lock the unit into the rack by using the ratcheting latch mechanism.
4. Reconnect the eight coax "quick-lock" connectors and the three electrical connectors.
5.18 GTX TRANSPONDER
Removal:
1. Unlock the GTX handle by loosening the Phillips screw on the handle.
2. Pull the handle upward to unlock the unit. Gently remove the unit from the rack.
Installation:
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Gently insert the GTX into its rack. The handle should engage the dogleg track.
3. Press down on the GTX handle to lock the unit into the rack.
4. Lock the handle to the unit body using the Philips screw.

Revision D 190-01597-00
5.19 GWX AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
NOTE
Take care to avoid any contact between tools that can become magnetized and the magnetron.
Even momentary contact of a potentially magnetic object with the magnetron case will cause
serious weakening of the magnetic field. Use of non-magnetic tools (typically beryllium copper
or titanium) is recommended when installing or servicing the GWX.
The GWX is located behind the radome. To access the GWX, remove the screws holding the radome according
to aircraft manufacturer’s instructions. Do not scratch or damage the radome.
Removal:
1. Remove the connector from the unit by pushing on the slide lock tab on the side of the connector which
releases it and pull the connector away from the unit.
2. Remove the mounting bolts. Note and save the shims or washers behind each mounting bolt location.
They will need to be reinstalled in the same locations.
Installation:
1. Place the same shims or washers in the same location where they were removed and install the four
mounting bolts. Torque the bolts to the specifications given in the OEM maintenance manual.
2. Attach the connector to the unit by first pressing the slide lock tab on the side of the connector, then align
and mate the unit and wire harness connectors together, and then release the slide lock tab. The locking
tabs must be engaged on both ends of the connector.
3. Verify that the wiring harness has been routed and secured in such a way that it cannot be struck by or
interfere with unit movement throughout the full range of sweep and tilt.
4. Install the radome according to OEM instructions.
5.20 CONFIGURATION MODULE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

Five configuration modules (Item 1 shown below) are located in the following LRU harness connector backshells
(Item 6): GDU PFD, and the GEA Engine/Airframe Unit (4).
Figure 5-5. Configuration Module Assembly

190-01597-00 Revision D
Removal:
1. Disconnect connector from LRU.
2. Remove 2 screws (8) from cover (7) and remove cover.
3. Unplug connector from configuration module (1).
4. Remove configuration module.
Installation:
1. Inspect connector for damaged pins (4).
2. Place configuration module (1) in position.
3. Insert connector into configuration module (1).
5.21 GEA BACKSHELL THERMOCOUPLE REMOVAL and REPLACEMENT
The GEA has a K-Type thermocouple (Item 1 shown below) installed in its backshell, in addition to the
configuration module. The thermocouple is used in conjunction with the configuration module temperature
sensor to compensate for temperature probe errors resulting from the dissimilar metals at the pin contacts.
Figure 5-6. GEA Backshell Thermocouple
Removal:
1. Remove GEA.
2. Remove GEA connector backplate.
3. Remove connector assembly J711 from the backplate.
4. Remove screws, item 7, and cover, item 6, from the backshell, item 5.
5. Unscrew thermocouple from boss on backshell. Extract the thermocouple pins from the connector.

Revision D 190-01597-00
Replacement:
1. Crimp pins, item 2, onto each of the thermocouple wires, item 1. Ensure that pre-stripped wire length is
1/8" prior to crimping.
2. Insert newly crimped pins and wires into the appropriate connector housing location, item 4, as specified
by the OEM Wiring Diagram.
3. Place thermocouple body, item 1, onto the backshell boss, item 5. Place the thermocouple as shown in
Figure 5-5 so that the wires exit towards the bottom of the backshell.
4. Fasten thermocouple tightly to backshell using the provided screw, item 3.
5. Fasten cover, item 6, to backshell using screws, item 7.

190-01597-00 Revision D
Blank Page

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 6—LRU SOFTWARE LOADING PROCEDURES
This section is to be completed when an LRU has failed and/or an LRU is replaced for other reasons. This section
should be completed if LRU’s are swapped from position to position. This is to ensure the correct software and
configurations are present.
NOTE
The procedures in this section reference the GTC for control and operations. If the system has a
GCU unit installed, that also may be used using the PFD knobs (inner and outer) and the ENT
key.
NOTE
DO NOT REMOVE POWER FROM THE G3000 WHEN LOADING SOFTWARE. Power loss
during a software load may cause an LRU to stop working. Replacing an LRU caused by
corrupted software due to power loss is not covered under warranty. Do not rely on only the
aircraft batteries when loading software. Connect a ground power unit to the aircraft.
NOTE
Screens in this section are only intended for visual reference only. All information depicted,
including software version and part numbers is subject to change and may not be current. Refer to
the OEM Aircraft Maintenance Manual for approved software versions and part numbers.
NOTE
DO NOT PRESS THE CANCEL SOFTKEY AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SCREEN DURING
THE SOFTWARE LOAD. If there is a software loading problem, allow the software to
automatically stop the load. Pressing the CANCEL softkey may result in an unresponsive LRU
requiring replacement.
NOTE
Use only SanDisk SD™ cards for loading software and configuration files. The use of other cards
is not approved.
6.1 PROCEDURES
6.1 Clearing Default User Settings
Begin by clearing the default user settings.
NOTE
Clearing default user settings will remove user data such as waypoints, flight plans, etc. It is
recommended that these be saved before clearing.
1. Remove power from PFD1, PFD2 and MFD by pulling the circuit breakers.
2. While holding the CLR button on PFD1, reset the PFD1 circuit breaker.
3. While holding the CLR button on PFD 2, reset the PFD2 circuit breaker.
4. While holding the second key from the right side of the MFD (beginning on the right side of the MFD,
count 2 keys to the left), reset the MFD circuit breaker.
5. When prompted to clear user settings, select the YES softkey on each unit.

190-01597-00 Revision D
6.2 LOADING LRU SOFTWARE
1. Remove and replace the LRU(s) per Section 5 and approved OEM shop procedures.
2. Install and secure the LRU(s) per Section 5 and approved OEM shop procedures.
3. Verify the G3000 is in configuration mode.
4. Retain the SD loader card in PFD1 top SD card slot. This card will be used to install all remaining G3000
software.
5. Verify the respective SYSTEM UPLOAD and SYSTEM STATUS pages are present on the GDUs.
Verify all the GTCs display the CONFIG MODE page.
6. Verify the G3000 core and optional component circuit breakers identified in the OEM maintenance
documentation are engaged.
7. On GTC1 select the GDU CONTROLS button.
8. Verify PFD1 is selected within the ‘Selected GDU’ section of the page.
9. Activate the cursor by pressing on the right inner knob on GTC1.
10. Rotate the inner knob on GTC1 to highlight the XXX BASE CONFIGURATION line item in the
GROUP window. (XXX equals the respective model)
11. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this configuration. Wait approximately one minute. Note- If
you select a model configuration that is different than what is currently installed you will be prompted to
confirm the selection.
12. Verify the OEM MODEL XXX BASE CONFIGURATION is flashing under the ITEM window. (XXX =
Model Number)
13. Rotate the inner knob on GTC1 to highlight OEM MODEL XXX BASE CONFIGURATION. (XXX =
Model Number)
14. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this model.
15. Verify the proper model is displayed in the ITEM window after the PRODUCT window is populated with
information.
16. Verify a list of software items are displayed in the PRODUCT window.
17. Select the CLR ALL command using GTC1 to remove all checkmarks from the display.
18. Using GTC1, rotate the inner knob to highlight the box of any software or configuration that needs to be
loaded for the respective LRU that was replaced.
19. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select the checkbox.
20. Repeat steps for all remaining required software and configuration software.
21. Using GTC1 select the LOAD command to install the configuration software. Note: Do not cancel a
software load in progress. If a failure occurs, wait until the fail message appears before proceeding.
22. Monitor the upload status.
23. Verify the UPLOAD COMPLETE window is displayed. Select the ENTER button on GTC1 to
acknowledge the following prompt.
24. If any configuration uploads fail, the upload must be repeated from the file that failed. Items that failed
the upload procedure should remain checked.

Revision D 190-01597-00
NOTE
Each system software load or configuration upload procedure can be repeated up to five (5) times
due to a failed or cancelled upload prompt message. Do not cancel a software upload that is in
progress, let the system either successfully load or fail. If five attempts have been completed
please contact Garmin Aviation Product Support for further assistance.
25. The software configuration and software load are now complete. Proceed to section 8 to complete the
configuration module loading and to install the required aircraft options.
26. Refer to section 8 for return to service checks that are required to be performed upon replacement of
specific LRUs.
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.3.1 G3000 In-Air Configuration Lockout
2. Retain the SD loader card in PFD1 top SD card slot.
4. Verify all the GTCs display the CONFIG MODE page.
5. On the GTC1 select the GDU CONTROLS button.
6. Verify PFD1 is selected within the Selected GDU section of the page.
7. Rotate the inner knob to highlight the SYSTEM STATUS view under the SYSTEM TAB.
8. Using the bezel buttons on PFD1 press the following sequence. Key 12, Key 11, Key 10, Key 12.
9. Verify the IN-AIR CONFIGURATION LOCKOUT annunciation is extinguished on PFD1.
10. Repeat steps for the MFD and PFD2.
6.3.2 Avionics Status Shows Amber/Red Checkbox
1. Remove the respective LRU from its installation rack or remove the connectors from the unit.
2. Perform visual inspection of the connector to observe any bent pins or push back pins/sockets. Repair as
necessary.
3. Verify LRU is powered. Verify power and ground signals are present at the respective connector.
4. Verify data bus lines are properly terminated and secure. Verify continuity by validating with an
ohmmeter that wires ring end to end, and not to each other, and to aircraft ground/shields. Note- This
includes all HSDB connections and A429 connections between the Garmin components. A429 data bus to
third part LRU’s will not affect the software loading procedure.
5. Verify location configuration strapping wiring is present and valid (if applicable).
6. Verify all other configuration strapping wiring is present and valid.
7. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support for further assistance.

190-01597-00 Revision D
6.3.3 Software Not Loading to LRU
1. Cycle power to the unit and retry loading software.
2. Disengage any redundant components and retry loading software. (i.e. Trouble loading GIA #1, disengage
GIA #2 CB)
3. Cycle aircraft power and start back up in software configuration mode and retry loading software.
4. Suspect wiring failure. Verify proper wiring and data bus communication to unit. Refer to Section 6.2.2.
5. Move suspect LRU to redundant location and reload software. Move suspect unit back to original location
when complete.
6. Remove and replace suspect LRU. Note- Do not mark unit as failed in component tracking until OEM
engineering has confirmed that the unit is faulty.
7. Contact Garmin Aviation Product Support for further assistance.

Revision D 190-01597-00
SECTION 7—PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
This section contains basic periodic maintenance procedures for the G3000. Refer to OEM approved aircraft
maintenance documentation for exact aircraft scheduled maintenance and intervals.
7.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES
7.1.1 Pitot/Static Leak Test
Perform a pitot/static leak test described in Title 14 CFR §§ 91.411 and Part 43 Appendix E. Allow the GDC to
operate at least 15 minutes before starting the test.
7.1.2 Altimeter (GDC and PFD)
According to Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), Garmin specifies a test procedure equivalent to Part 43
Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1) with two exceptions: the tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (vi) (Barometric
Scale Error).
7.1.3 Airspeed Function Test (GDC and PFD)
Check for correct indication.
7.1.4 Vertical Speed Indicator (GDC and PFD)
Check for correct indication.
7.1.5 GTX Transponder
Test according to Title 14 CFR §§ 91.411, 91.413 and Part 43 Appendix F.
7.1.6 GRS Earth Magnetic Field Updates
The GRS uses an earth magnetic field model which is updated once every five years. The update is expected to
be available from Garmin by July 1 of each of the following years: 2010, 2015, and every five years thereafter, as
long as the GRS remains a Garmin supported product. Otherwise maintenance of the GRS is on condition of
failure only.
7.1.7 GA Antenna
Maintenance of the GA antenna is “on-condition” only. Periodic maintenance is not required.
7.1.8 GIA IAU
Maintenance of the GIA is “on condition” for all units installed in airframes that require power interrupt Category
B (50mS). For airframes that require the GIA to comply with RTCA/DO-160D or RTCA/DO-160E (as specified
in applicable Environmental Qualification Form) power interrupt Category A (200mS), compliance with the
applicable GIA Mod Status described in the following table must be accomplished.
Long Term Power Interrupt Category A (200 mS) Mod Status

190-01579-00 Revision D
7.1.9 GCU PFD Controller
Maintenance of the GCU is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
aircraft maintenance manuals or manual supplements for actual aircraft maintenance
requirements.
7.1.10 GDC Air Data Computer
Per Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), Garmin specifies a test procedure equivalent to Part 43 Appendix E,
paragraph (b)(1). The tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (vi) (Barometric Scale Error) are not applicable
because the digital outputs of the GDC are not susceptible to these types of errors. Other than periodic testing as
required by 14CFR91.411 and in accordance with the above information, maintenance of the GDC 7400 is ‘on
condition’ only.
7.1.11 GDL 59
Maintenance of the GDL 59 is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
aircraft maintenance manuals or manual supplements for actual aircraft maintenance requirements.
7.1.12 GDL 69
No schedule servicing tasks or internal manual adjustments are required on the GDL 69 Series. If installation
requires use of audio suppression inputs, each installed input must be verified for proper operation on an annual
basis.
7.1.13 GDU Display
Maintenance of the GDU is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
7.1.14 GEA Engine And Airframe Interface Unit
Maintenance of the GEA is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
7.1.15 GMA Audio Controller
Other than for regulatory periodic functional checks, maintenance of the GMA is “on condition” only.
7.1.16 GMC AFCS Mode Controller
Maintenance of the GMC is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
7.1.17 GMU Magnetometer
After mechanical and electrical installation of the GRS AHRS and GMU magnetometer have been completed,
prior to operation, a set of post-installation calibration procedures must be carried out.
7.1.18 GRS AHRS
After mechanical and electrical installation of the GRS AHRS and GMU magnetometer have been completed,
prior to operation, a set of post-installation calibration procedures must be carried out.
7.1.19 GSA Servo Actuator/GSM Servo Gearbox
Maintenance of the GSA/GSM is “on condition” only.
7.1.20 GSD Data Concentrator
Maintenance of the GSD is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
7.1.21 GSR Iridium Satellite Transceiver
Maintenance of the GSR is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
Revision D 190-01579-00
7.1.22 GTA Trim Adapter
Maintenance of the GTA is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional checks, refer to approved
7.1.23 GTC Touchscreen Controller
Maintenance of the GTC is “on condition” only.
Screen Cleaning
Screen Cleaning mode temporarily deactivates touch input on the Touchscreen Controller glass screen to facilitate
cleaning. Garmin recommends using a microfiber or soft cotton cloth lightly dampened with clean water to clean
the glass surface of the Touchscreen Controller. Do not use chemical cleaning agents, as these may damage the
coating on the glass surface.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Controller screen:
1. From Home, touch Utilities > Screen Cleaning.
2. The Touchscreen Controller indicates the screen may be cleaned. Clean the screen as needed.
3. Press or turn any knob to return to the Utilities Screen.
7.1.24 GTS Processor
Before returning the aircraft to service, the GTS Configuration and Checkout Log must be completed and attached
with the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness so that any aircraft with the modifications detailed in this
manual may be properly maintained.
7.1.25 GTX Transponder
Test according to Title 14 CFR §§ 91.411 and 91.413 as well as Part 43 Appendix F. Other than for
regulatory checks, maintenance of the GTX is ‘on condition’ only.
7.1.26 GWX Weather Radar
Other than for regulatory checks, maintenance of the GWX is ‘on condition’ only.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Blank Page

Revision D 190-01579-00
SECTION 8—SYSTEM SOFTWARE LOADING PROCEDURES
G3000 system software is originally loaded and configured during the initial installation (for a new system).
There may be a situation where the only solution to a troubleshooting problem is to perform the procedures in this
section. Consult with Garmin aviation product support to determine if another solution to a problem exists
before reloading system software.
NOTE
The system immediately initializes upon power up. On screen prompts must be given careful
attention in order to avoid potential loss of data. Read through procedures before attempting to
load software.
NOTE
If an SD card with software image is to be created, a PC, SD card, and SD card reader/writer is
required.
NOTE
Only SanDisk brand SD cards are approved for use.
8.1 SOFTWARE LOADER CARD

Prior to installation on the aircraft a software loader card that contains the required system software and software
configuration must be built. This loader card is built from a Garmin software program which is provided for every
software load. This software program will program the SD Loader card with the required files. All cards used for
software installation must meet the requirements set forth in Garmin drawing labeled with the correct part number
for the Garmin approved SD Card Manufacturers list.
8.2 VERIFICATION
8.2.1 System Status Verification
1. Verify the G3000 is powered on and fully initialized in normal mode.
2. Verify all of the circuit breakers providing power to the respective G3000 components identified in the
OEM Aircraft Maintenance Manual are engaged.
3. Using GTC1 from the Home page select the UTILITIES button, and then select the SETUP button and
then select the AVIONICS STATUS button.
4. Verify a green check mark is shown next to all of the LRUs. If all LRUs are green proceed to section
8.2.2, if not proceed to section 8.8 for troubleshooting.
190-01579-00 Revision D
5. Press the MSG button on GTC1 (if present).
6. Verify no MANIFEST messages are present.
7. Verify the AVIONICS CONFIG CAS message is not present in the CAS Stack.
8.2.2 System Software Verification
1. Verify the G3000 is powered on and fully initialized in normal mode.
3. Using GTC1 from the Home page select the UTILITIES button, and then select the SETUP button, and
then select the AVIONICS STATUS button. On the AVIONICS STATUS page select the AIRFRAME
tab.
[Type a quote from

the document or the
summary of an
interesting point.
You can position
the text box
anywhere in the
document. Use the
Text Box Tools tab
to change the
formatting of the
pull quote text
box.]
4. Reference the drawing list and determine the application software load and configuration for this
installation.
5. Verify the software load reported on the AIRFRAME tab matches the software called out for this
installation validated in the previous step. If yes proceed to section 8.2.3. If no, proceed and complete
section 8.3 and repeat this section when complete.
8.2.3 Aircraft Optional Software Verification
1. Verify the G3000 is powered on and fully initialized.
3. Using GTC1 from the Home page select the UTILITIES button, and then select the SETUP button, and
then select the AVIONICS STATUS button.
4. Review the current aircraft order and determine which optional Garmin LRU components are required to
be installed.
5. Verify a green check mark is shown next to all of the optional LRUs that are required for installation. If
all LRUs are green verification is complete. If no, proceed and complete section 8.5 and repeat this
section when complete.

Revision D 190-01579-00
8.3 AIRCRAFT BASE SOFTWARE/CONFIGURATION (INSTALL)
This section is required to be completed anytime the installed aircraft system software is not the correct software
load or when no apparent solution to a troubleshooting problem can be found. For the list of software loading
exceptions and approved system software, reference the approved drawing list.
8.3.1 Clearing Default User Settings
It is important that anytime after a GDU/GTC software update and configuration load is accomplished, all of the
user data be cleared. Note that clearing default user settings will remove user data such as user waypoints, stored
flight plans, and pilot selections. If desired, stored flight plans (not user waypoints or pilot selections) can be
saved to an SD card, refer to the Pilot’s Guide for instructions. Clearing user data can be performed using the
Avionics Settings Menu on the GTC 570.
1. Load GDU/GTC software and configuration files. Wait 10 minutes (applicable only to 3.0X
software and older).
2. From the GTC1 Home Screen, touch Utilities. The Utilities Screen is displayed.
3. Touch Setup. The Setup Page is displayed.
4. Touch Avionics Settings. The Avionics Settings Page is displayed.
5. Scroll down until the ‘Clear User Data’ button is displayed:
6. Touch ‘Clear User Data.’ The following window is displayed:

190-01579-00 Revision D
7. Touch OK.
8. The ‘User Settings Cleared’ message will be displayed on each GDU to verify that all user data has been
cleared.
8.3.2 Loading Procedures

software.
Verify the GTC display is in CONFIG MODE.
System Status Page System Upload Page

4. Verify the G3000 core component circuit breakers identified in the OEM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
are engaged.

Revision D 190-01579-00
6. Verify PFD1 is selected within the selected GDU section of the page.

8. With GTC1, rotate the inner knob to highlight the XXX BASE CONFIGURATION line item in the
GROUP window. (XXX equals the respective model.)
Model Number.)
11. With GTC1, rotate the inner knob to highlight OEM MODEL XXX BASE CONFIGURATION. (XXX =
Model Number)
information.

190-01579-00 Revision D
15. Using GTC1 select the LOAD command to install the full base configuration software. Note: Do not
cancel a software load in progress. If a failure occurs, wait until the fail message appears before
proceeding.
18. If any software or configuration uploads fail, the upload must be repeated from the file that failed. Items
that failed the upload procedure should remain checked.
19. The base configuration software load is now complete. Proceed to section 8.4 to complete the
configuration module loading or proceed to section 8.5 to install the required aircraft options.
20. Complete return to service checks after all remaining software and configuration has been loaded (section
8.11).
8.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE LOADING
The configuration module is installed in the backshell of the connector on PFD1. The configuration module stores
the configuration and software settings of the current installed G3000 equipment. This section is required to be
completed anytime the aircraft software and/or configuration are modified. This section must be completed
anytime the aircraft order has changed, or if aircraft base software/configuration, aircraft options, or the removal
of aircraft options has been completed.
software.
4. Verify the G3000 core component circuit breakers identified in the OEM aircraft maintenance manual are
engaged.
5. Verify the required G3000 optional component circuit breakers in the OEM aircraft maintenance manual
are engaged.
6. Using GTC1 highlight the UPDT CFG line select key on the PFD1 and select ENTER.
7. Select YES and press the ENTER key on GTC1 to acknowledge the following prompt.
8. Monitor the update status and press the ENTER key to acknowledge the successful load. If the load is not
successful repeat step 7. If the second load does not work replace the configuration module and repeat
step 7.
9. Verify the XXXX AIRFRAME OPTION is flashing under the ITEM window.
8.5 AIRCRAFT OPTIONS (INSTALL)
This section is required to be completed anytime an aircraft optional system is ordered and the required software
for that system has not been installed. This section must be completed anytime the aircraft order has changed, or if
base software/configuration or aircraft options installation have been completed.
1. Identify the options being ordered by referencing the most current version of the aircraft order.
2. Verify the G3000 is in software configuration mode.
software.

Revision D 190-01579-00
5. Verify the G3000 core component circuit breakers identified in the OEM aircraft maintenance manual are
engaged.
6. Verify the required G3000 optional component circuit breakers in the OEM aircraft maintenance manual
are engaged.
7. Rotate the right outer knob on GTC1 until the GROUP WINDOW is selected.
8. Rotate the inner knob to highlight the OPTIONS line item in the GROUP window.
9. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this group item.
10. Verify the XXXX OPTION is flashing under the ITEM window.
11. Rotate the inner knob to highlight desired XXXX OPTION.
12. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this option.
13. Verify the proper option is displayed in the ITEM window after the PRODUCT window is populated with
information.
15. Using GTC1 select the LOAD command to install the option’s software.
16. Repeat steps 11 through 15 and load remaining options.
17. The option configuration software load is now complete. Proceed to section 8.4 to complete the
configuration module programming.
8.6 AIRFRAME CONFIGURATIONS OPTIONS (INSTALL)
This section is required to be completed anytime an airframe optional system is ordered and the required software
for that system has not been installed. This section must be completed anytime the aircraft order has changed, or if
base software/configuration install or aircraft options removal have been completed.
1. Identify the options being ordered by referencing the most current version of the Aircraft Order.
3. Retain the SD loader card in the PFD1 top SD card slot. This card will be used to install all remaining
G3000 software.
are engaged.
6. Verify the required G3000 optional component circuit breakers in the OEM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
are engaged.
7. Rotate the right outer knob on GTC1 until the GROUP WINDOW is selected.
8. Rotate the inner knob to highlight the AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION OPTIONS line item in the
GROUP window.
9. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this group item.
10. Verify the XXXX AIRFRAME OPTION is flashing under the ITEM window.
11. Rotate the inner knob to highlight desired XXXX AIRFRAME OPTION.
12. Press the ENTER button on GTC1 to select this option.

190-01579-00 Revision D
13. Verify the proper option is displayed in the ITEM window after the PRODUCT window is populated with
information.
15. Using GTC1 select the LOAD command to install the option’s software.
16. Repeat steps 8 through 12 and load remaining options.
17. The airframe option configuration software load is now complete. Proceed to section 8.4 to complete the
configuration module loading.
8.7 AIRCRAFT OPTIONS (REMOVAL)
This section is required to be completed anytime an option is removed or needs to be disabled from the aircraft.
After completing this process aircraft options install and airframe configuration options install must be completed
again for any remaining options.
1. Verify the G3000 Avionics System is in software configuration mode.
2. Retain the SD loader card in the PFD1 top SD card slot. This card will be used to install all remaining
G3000 software.
4. Verify all the GTCs display the CONFIG MODE page.
are engaged.
9. With GTC1, rotate the inner knob to highlight the XXX BASE CONFIGURATION line item in the
GROUP window. (XXX equals the respective model)
Model Number)
12. With GTC1, rotate the inner knob to highlight OEM MODEL XXX BASE CONFIGURATION. (XXX =
Model Number)
information.
16. Using GTC1 select the CLR ALL command to remove all checkmarks from the display.
17. Using GTC1 select the CHK CFG command to select only the configuration software.
18. Using GTC1 select the LOAD command to install the configuration software. Note: Do not cancel a
software load in progress. If a failure occurs, wait until the fail message appears before proceeding.

Revision D 190-01579-00
21. If any configuration uploads fail, the upload must be repeated from the file that failed. Items that failed
the upload procedure should remain checked.
22. The configuration software load is now complete. Proceed to section 8.4 to complete the configuration
module loading or proceed to section 8.6 to install the required aircraft options.
8.8 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.8.1 G3000 In-Air Configuration Lockout
2. Retain the SD loader card in PFD1 top SD card slot.
4. On the GTC1 select the GDU CONTROLS button.
6. Rotate the inner knob to highlight the SYSTEM STATUS view under the SYSTEM TAB.
7. Using the bezel buttons on PFD1 press the following sequence. Key 12, Key 11, Key 10, Key 12
8. Verify the IN-AIR CONFIGURATION LOCKOUT annunciation is extinguished on PFD1.
9. Repeat steps for the MFD and PFD2.
8.8.2 Avionics Status Shows Amber/Red Checkbox
1. Remove the respective LRU from its installation rack or remove the connectors from the unit.
2. Perform visual inspection of the connector to observe any bent pins or push back pins/sockets. Repair as
necessary.
3. Verify LRU is powered. Verify power and ground signals are present at the respective connector.
4. Verify data bus lines are properly terminated and secure. Verify continuity by validating with an
ohmmeter that wires ring end to end, and not to each other, and to aircraft ground/shields. Note- This
includes all HSDB connections and A429 connections between the Garmin components. A429 data bus to
third part LRU’s will not affect the software loading procedure.
5. Verify location configuration strapping wiring is present and valid (if applicable).
6. Verify all other configuration strapping wiring is present and valid.
7. Contact Garmin Product Support for further assistance.
8.8.3 Software Not Loading to LRU
1. Cycle power to the unit and retry loading software.
2. Disengage any redundant components and retry loading software. (i.e. Trouble loading GIA #1, disengage
GIA #2 CB)
3. Cycle aircraft power and start back up in software configuration mode and retry loading software.
4. Suspect wiring failure. Verify proper wiring and data bus communication to unit. Refer to Section above.
5. Move suspect LRU to redundant location and reload software. Move suspect unit back to original location
when complete.
6. Remove and replace suspect LRU. Note- Do not mark unit as failed in component tracking until OEM
engineering has confirmed that the unit is faulty.

190-01579-00 Revision D
7. Contact Garmin Product Support for further assistance.
8.9 AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION
8.9.1 Transponders and TCAS
are engaged.
3. Depress the right inner knob of GTC1 to activate the system configuration menu.
4. Rotate the right outer knob on GTC1 until the SYSTEM tab is selected.
5. Rotate GTC1 right inner knob to highlight the AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION line.
6. Depress the right inner knob of GTC1 to activate the cursor in the AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION page.
The cursor will appear in the aircraft registration line.
Figure 8-1. Aircraft Configuration Page

7. Using the inner knob enter the Aircraft Tail number. Rotate GTC1 right inner knob to select the character
in the selected field. Rotate the outer knob to select the field. The ICAO Address will be auto-populated
once the aircraft registration is inputted.
8. IATA Airline Designator- Enter Desired Setting
9. Country Code- Enter Desired Setting
10. VFR Code- Enter Desired Setting
11. Using GTC1 soft key Select commands, select the SET GTX1 command to program the #1 GTX-3000.
Select OK on the confirmation window.
12. Using GTC1 soft key Select commands, select the SET GTX2 command to program the #2 GTX-3000 (if
there is a number 2 installed). Select OK on the confirmation window.
13. Using GTC1 soft key Select commands, select the SET GTS command to program the GTS-8000. Select
OK on the confirmation window.

Revision D 190-01579-00
8.10 DATABASE LOADING PROCEDURES
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD
cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not all
SD cards are compatible with the G3000. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card other
than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be monitored
on the Avionics Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the power-
up screen and the effective date on the Avionics Status Screen being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes;
or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to
FlyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.
8.10.1 Jeppesen Databases
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day
cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer
function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
The ChartView database should be copied to a Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside in the
bottom card slot on of one of the GDUs. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or Automatic
Database Synchronization Features):
1. With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card
slot of MFD with the label of SD card facing left.
2. Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to Figure 8-2 is presented on the MFD display:
Figure 8-2. Standby Navigation Database Prompt

3. Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4. A prompt similar to Figure 8-3 is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Figure 8-3. Database Update Confirmation
5. After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
6. Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7. Turn the system ON.
8. From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
9. If necessary, touch the Database Tab. The Touchscreen Controller shows a list of displays on which
databases reside.
10. Touch the MFD1 button from the list to view the navigation database information. Verify the active
navigation database cycle information is correct. While the database is copying, progress can be
monitored at the bottom of the applicable database field. When copying is finished, ‘Sync Complete’ is
displayed.
11. Touch Back to return to the list of displays, and repeat step 10 to verify the information for each display.
The new active navigation database is copied to the internal memory of PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, and GTC2.
12. When copying is complete to all GDUs and GTCs, turn the system OFF.
13. Turn the system ON.
8.10.2 Dual Navigation Database Feature
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the bottom
SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new database
becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should be
stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will copy the
navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card remains in the
card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active database as soon as
it becomes effective.
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby database is
current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the active internal
database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately 45-55 seconds. The
pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
1. With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card
slot of MFD with the label of SD card facing left.

Revision D 190-01579-00
2. Ensure a Supplemental Data Card is inserted into the bottom card slot of each GDU.
3. Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to Figure 8-4 is presented on the MFD display:
Figure 8-4. Standby Navigation Database Prompt

4. Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the Supplemental Data Card in the bottom
card slot of MFD.
5. After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom card, the display will appear as shown in
Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5. Standby Navigation Database Update Complete

6. As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure
8-6.
Figure 8-6. Navigation Database Verification Prompt

7. Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure 8-7.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Figure 8-7. Active Navigation Database Prompt
8. Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not
yet valid, it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not
remove power while the display is starting.
9. Press any key to acknowledge the startup screen.
databases reside.
12. The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of PFD1 and PFD2. While the
database is copying, progress can be monitored at the bottom of the applicable database field. When
copying is finished, ‘Sync Complete’ is displayed.
13. Turn system power OFF.
14. Remove the SD card from the top card slot of MFD.
15. Apply power to the system.
databases reside.
18. Touch a button from the list to view database information associated with that display MFD1, PFD1,
PFD2, GTC1, GTC2.
19. Scroll through the database information and verify the standby navigation database cycle information is
correct.
20. Touch Back to return to the list of displays, and repeat steps 17 through 19 to verify the standby
navigation cycle information for each display.
21. When finished, touch Back or Home.
8.10.3 Automatic Database Synchronization Feature
When updating the active navigation database, the automatic database synchronization feature automatically
transfers the navigation database from a single SD Card to the internal memory of all GDUs and GTCs. When
updating all other databases (including the standby navigation database) the data is transferred from a single SD
card to the remaining SD cards on each GDU, as well as the internal memory of each GTC. After power-up, the
system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar databases do not match, the most recent valid
database is automatically copied to each card in the system that does not already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Navigation, Basemap, SafeTaxi, Terrain, Obstacle,
FliteCharts, ChartView, and Airport Directory.
Revision D 190-01579-00
NOTE: The terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method. Therefore the
user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power source while performing
the database synchronization.
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the Database Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller
(Figure 8-8). This screen shows the synchronization status of each applicable database as follows:
• Sync in Progress with percent complete
• Sync Complete
• Sync Error
While database synchronization is occurring, ‘Sync in Progress’ is displayed along with percent complete. When
the synchronization is complete for the selected GDU or GTC Database Status Screen, the status is listed as ‘Sync
Complete’. The synchronization status is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred on the current
power-up.
An indication of ‘Sync Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.
To view database status:
databases reside.
3. Touch a button from the list to view database information associated with that display MFD, PFD1,
PFD2, GTC1, GTC2.
4. Scroll through the database information to view database status.
Figure 8-8. Avionics Status Screen, Database Information Window

If an error occurs during the synchronization, ‘Sync Error’ is displayed in the synchronization status field (Figure
8-9). If synchronization completes for one GDU or GTC, but an error occurs for another, the error message will
be displayed on the Database Status Screen for the affected GDU or GTC. When an error message is displayed,
the problem must be corrected before the synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart
synchronization.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Figure 8-9. Synchronization Error Message
8.10.4 Garmin Databases
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards. A Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card slot of each
GDU, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10. Correct Database Locations

Databases residing on Supplemental Data Cards are not stored internally in the displays (except for the
Touchscreen Controllers), therefore, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be
kept in the bottom card slot each GDU.

Revision D 190-01579-00
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns. It is
updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. This database is updated periodically and has no
expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and
offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of
FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a 28-
day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
Updating Garmin Databases
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’
section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website,
a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from each GDU.
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database product
functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service facility in
order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1. With system power OFF, remove the Supplemental Data Card from the bottom card slot of MFD.
2. Update the Garmin databases on the Supplemental Data Card.
3. Insert the Supplemental Data Card into the bottom card slot of MFD.
4. Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up
screen (Figure 8-11). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message
may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to
step 5.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Figure 8-11. Database Information on the Power-up Screen
databases reside.
7. The new databases are copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the appropriate displays.
While the database is copying, progress can be monitored at the bottom of the applicable database
field. When copying is finished, ‘Sync Complete’ is displayed.
8. Turn system power OFF.
9. Apply power to the system.
10. From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status. If
necessary, touch the Database Tab. The Touchscreen Controller shows a list of displays on which
databases reside.
11. Touch a button from the list to view database information associated with that display (MFD1
(MFD), PFD1 (PFD1), PFD2 (PFD2), GTC1, (GTC2).
12. Scroll through the database information and verify the database cycle information is correct.
13. Touch Back to return to the list of displays, and repeat steps 11 through 13 to verify the database
cycle information for each display.
14. When finished, touch Back or Home.
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update
The Magnetic Field Variation Database is loaded as part of the navigation database, but is copied to, and resides
within each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). At startup, the system compares the MV DB within the navigation
database to that presently residing in each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). When a new navigation database is loaded,
the system may determine the newly loaded MV DB within the navigation database is newer than that residing in
each AHRS. In this case, the system will prompt for an update. This prompt is displayed on the Touchscreen
Controller (GTC), as shown in Figure 8-12. Note, in this example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to indicate an update
is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the system. GRS2 may
be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.

Revision D 190-01579-00
Figure 8-12. GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt (Touchscreen Controller)
Loading the Magnetic Field Variation Database update:
1. With the MV DB prompt displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12, touch the OK Button. A progress monitor
is displayed as shown in Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-13. Uploading Database to GRS1

2. When the upload is complete, the prompt for the next GRS upload is displayed, as seen in Figure 8-14. A
database mismatch message, as seen in Figure 8-15, indicates the second GRS has not yet been updated.

190-01579-00 Revision D
Figure 8-14. GRS2 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
Figure 8-15. Database Mismatch Message is Annunciated Before Second GRS is Updated
3. Touch the OK Button. A progress monitor for the next GRS is displayed as in step 1. When the upload is
complete, the system is ready for use.

Revision D 190-01579-00
8.11 RETURN TO SERVICE PROCEDURES
This section is to be completed in its entirety after completing section 8.3.
8.11.1 Software Integrity Check
Complete Section 8.2.
8.11.2 Air Data, Attitude, Heading Tests
1. Connect an air data test cart to the aircraft and simulate airspeed, mach, and altitude range throughout the
aircraft’s approved operating range.
2. Verify Airspeed indications displayed on the displays are correct. (Can be performed with step 7.)
3. Verify Mach indications displayed on the displays are correct. (Can be performed with step 7.)
4. Verify Altimeter indications displayed on the displays are correct. (Can be performed with step 7.)
5. Verify VSI indications displayed on the displays are correct. (Can be performed with step 7.)
6. Verify SSEC corrections by running the model specific Garmin and Standby Air Data Systems FT.
Document the results.
7. Verify Attitude and Heading System properly initializes and is displayed correctly.
8. Position the aircraft on a calibrated compass rose. Perform a heading check to verify the heading is within
±5° at the following headings: 0/360°, 90°, 180°, and 270°.
8.11.3 Navigation Tests
1. Using IFR 4000 and IFR 6000 test equipment simulate the various navigation system signals.
2. Verify VOR indications and operation is correct per given test simulation.
3. Verify ILS indications and operation is correct per given test simulation.
4. Verify LOC indications and operation is correct per given test simulation.
5. Verify DME indications and operation is correct per given test simulation.
6. Verify ADF indications and operation is correct per given test simulation.
7. With aircraft positioned outside verify proper GPS reception and operation. While taxiing aircraft verify
proper GPS reception and operation. (Note- GPS reception can be affected when next to buildings)
8.11.4 VHF COM Tests
1. Using VHF 1, conduct ground VHF COM checks with TDS and verify proper operation.
2. Using VHF 2, conduct ground VHF COM checks with TDS and verify proper operation.
3. Using VHF 3/GDR-66, conduct ground VHF COM checks with TDS and verify proper operation.
8.11.5 Transponder and TCAS Tests
1. Using required test equipment simulate the various transponder and TCAS operations.
2. Verify Transponders functionality and indications are correct per given test simulation.
3. Verify TCAS functionality and indications are correct per given test simulation.
4. Verify TCAS is transmitting proper mode C and mode S signals using the IFR-6000.

190-01579-00 Revision D
8.11.6 EICAS Indications
1. Conduct engine run and verify the following functionality performs properly. Verify indications are
appropriate and no indications are erratic or erroneous for the respective operation. Where applicable
review the respective synoptic to ensure proper aircraft operation and system I/O. Indication review must
be performed with engines at IDLE and with engines at TAKEOFF thrust.
2. Verify Engine Indications.
3. Verify CAS messages.
4. Verify Hydraulic indications.
5. Verify Electrical indications.
6. Verify trim indications.
7. Verify speed brake indications.
8. Verify flap/slat indications.
8.11.7 Autopilot Operations
1. Simulate air mode.
2. Engage the Autopilot system
3. Activate the AP DISC and verify the autopilot disconnects.
4. Engage the Autopilot system.
5. Activate manual trim. Verify the autopilot system disconnects and manual trim moves. Verify the trim
surface moves in the appropriate direction.
6. Engage the Autopilot system.
7. Engage the various autopilot modes and verify proper operation. Verify the surface moves in the
appropriate direction.
8. Verify autopilot system responds to flight director display.
9. With autopilot engaged, introduce pitch, roll, and yaw manual commands and verify the surface will
move against the autopilot.
8.11.8 GTC Operations
1. Using the System Test page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.
2. Using the Cabin Management page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.
3. Using the Exterior Lights page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.
4. Using the Temperature page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.
5. Using the Propulsion page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.
6. Using the Cabin Pressure page on the GTC verify proper aircraft response per the given button.

Revision D 190-01579-00
APPENDIX A — LRU CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS
This section contains pin names and descriptions for LRU connectors.
A.1 GDU Display Unit

J14001 Connector
J14001 on GDU
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND Out
2 ETHERNET OUT 1 A Out
3 ETHERNET OUT 1 B Out
4 ETHERNET IN 1 A In
5 ETHERNET IN 1 B In
14 SPARE DISCRETE IN* In
15 REVERSIONARY MODE SELECT 2 In
16 ARINC 429 IN 2 A In
17 ARINC 429 IN 2 B In
20 LIGHTING BUS 2 HI In
21 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO In
22 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
23 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 SIGNAL GROUND --
27 POWER GROUND --
28 EXT ENCODER IN* 3 In
29 POWER GROUND --
30 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 POWER GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page A-1

190-01579-00 Revision D
Connector J14001, continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
35 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
36 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 SIGNAL GROUND --
42 SIGNAL GROUND --
43 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
44 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
45 RS-232 IN 1 In
46 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
47 RS-232 IN 2 In
48 ETHERNET OUT 4A Out
52 EXT ENCODER IN* 1 Out
53 RESERVED --
54 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
55 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
58 REVERSIONARY MODE SELECT 1 In
59 LIGHTING BUS HI In
60 LIGHTING BUS LO In
* Indicates Active Low
Page A-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Revision D 190-01579-00
J23010 Connector
J23010 on GDU
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 In
J23020 Connector
J23020 on GDU
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 In

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.2 GTC Touch Screen Controller
J5701 Connector
J5701 on GTC
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 SPARE_1* In
20 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 SIGNAL GROUND --
27 POWER GROUND --
28 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 HI In
29 POWER GROUND --
30 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 POWER GROUND --
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 POWER GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
36 SIGNAL GROUND --
37 RESERVED --
38 SIGNAL GROUND --

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
40 SIGNAL GROUND --
41 RESERVED --
42 SIGNAL GROUND --
43 RESERVED --
44 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
45 RS-232 IN 1 In
46 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
47 RS-232 IN 2 In
48 RESERVED --
49 RESERVED --
50 RESERVED --
51 RESERVED --
52 RESERVED --
53 RESERVED --
54 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
55 GTC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
58 SPARE_2* In
61 RESERVED --
62 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 HI In

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.3 GIA Integrated Avionics Unit
J601 (COM)
J601 on GIA
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED (UNSQUELCHED AUDIO TEST) --
2 RESERVED --
3 RESERVED --
4 COM MIC KEY* In
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 COM MIC AUDIO IN HI In
8 COM MIC AUDIO IN LO (GROUND) --
9 COM 500 AUDIO OUT HI Out
10 COM 500 AUDIO OUT LO Out
11 TRANSMIT INTERLOCK* In
12 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* In
13 COM DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
14 ON-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
15 SIGNAL GROUND --
16 COM REMOTE POWER OFF In
SPARE --
18 CROSS-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO IN (011-01105-20 AND In
011-01105-30 ONLY)
20 SPARE --
22 SPARE --
24 SPARE --
26 SPARE --
28 RESERVED --
29 RESERVED --
30 POWER GROUND --
31 POWER GROUND --
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --
† Pin not currently supported

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED --
38 RESERVED --
39 RESERVED --
40 RESERVED --
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 POWER GROUND --
44 POWER GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J602 (VOR/ILS)
J602 on GIA
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 44
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 VOR/LOC +TO Out
VOR/LOC +FROM (VOR/LOC COMMON) Out
2
VOR/LOC +FROM (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
3 VOR/LOC +FLAG Out
VOR/LOC -FLAG (VOR/LOC COMMON) Out
4
VOR/LOC -FLAG (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
5 VOR/LOC +LEFT Out
VOR/LOC +RIGHT (VOR/LOC COMMON) Out
6
VOR/LOC +RIGHT (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
7 RESERVED --
8 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT Out
9 VOR OBS ROTOR C Out
10 VOR OBS ROTOR H (GROUND) --
VOR OBS STATOR E (VOR/LOC COMMON) Out
11
VOR OBS STATOR E (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
12 VOR OBS STATOR F In
13 VOR OBS STATOR D In
VOR OBS STATOR G (VOR/LOC COMMON) Out
14
VOR OBS STATOR G (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
15 VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG Out
16 VOR/LOC 500 AUDIO OUT HI Out
17 VOR/LOC 500 AUDIO OUT LO Out
18 KING SERIAL DME CLOCK (011-00781-0() AND 011-01105-0() ONLY) Out
19 KING SERIAL DME DATA (011-00781-0() AND 011-01105-0() ONLY) Out
20 KING SERIAL RNAV REQUEST (011-00781-0() AND 011-01105-0() ONLY) In
21 KING SERIAL RNAV* MODE (011-00781-0() AND 011-01105-0() ONLY) In
22 SIGNAL GROUND --
23 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B Out
24 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A Out
25 VOR OBI CLOCK Out
26 VOR OBI SYNC Out
27 VOR OBI DATA Out
28 VOR/ILS REMOTE TRANSFER* In
29 ILS ENERGIZE* Out
30 RESERVED --
31 RESERVED --
32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG Out
33 PARALLEL DME 1 MHZ-D Out
34 GLIDESLOPE +UP Out
35 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B In
36 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A In

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 PARALLEL DME 100 KHZ-A Out
38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG Out
39 PARALLEL DME 100 KHZ-B Out
40 PARALLEL DME 100 KHZ-C Out
41 DME COMMON In
42 PARALLEL DME 100 KHZ-D Out
43 PARALLEL DME 50 KHZ Out
44 RESERVED --
45 PARALLEL DME 1 MHZ-A Out
46 PARALLEL DME 1 MHZ-B Out
47 PARALLEL DME 1 MHZ-C Out
48 RESERVED --
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 RESERVED --
51 SPARE --
52 SPARE --
GLIDESLOPE –FLAG (GLIDESLOPE COMMON) Out
53
GLIDESLOPE –FLAG (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
54 PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-E Out
GLIDESLOPE +DOWN (GLIDESLOPE COMMON) Out
55
GLIDESLOPE +DOWN (NAV COMMON) (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
56 PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-E Out
57 RESERVED --
SPARE --
58
GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE OUT (011-01105-20 AND 011-01105-30 ONLY) Out
59 VOR/LOC DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
60 SIGNAL GROUND --
61 POWER GROUND --
62 POWER GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J603 (Main Serial)
J603 on GIA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
2 ETHERNET OUT A Out
3 ETHERNET OUT B Out
4 RS-485 4 A I/O
5 RS-485 4 A I/O
6 RS-485 4 B I/O
7 RS-485 4 B I/O
8 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 3 A In
9 MAIN ARINC 429 IN 3 B In
20 CAN BUS 1 HI I/O
21 RESERVED --
22 CAN BUS 1 LO I/O
23 RS-485 1 A I/O
24 RS-485 1 B I/O
25 RS-485 2 A I/O
26 RS-485 2 B I/O
27 RS-485 3 A/RS-422 IN A I/O
28 RS-485 3 B/RS-422 IN B I/O
30 CAN BUS 2 LO I/O
32 CAN BUS 2 HI I/O
34 CAN BUS 1 TERMINATION --
36 RS-485 5 A/RS-422 OUT A I/O

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 RS-485 5 B/RS-422 OUT B I/O
38 RESERVED --
39 CAN BUS 2 TERMINATION --
40 RESERVED --
41 MAIN RS-232 IN 1 In
42 SIGNAL GROUND --
43 MAIN RS-232 OUT 1 Out
45 SIGNAL GROUND --
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
54 SIGNAL GROUND --
57 SIGNAL GROUND --
60 RESERVED --
61 SIGNAL GROUND --
64 SIGNAL GROUND --
66 RESERVED --
67 GPS PPS OUT Out
68 RESERVED --
69 VOICE ALERT DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
70 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
71 MAIN ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
76 ETHERNET IN A In
77 ETHERNET IN B In
78 RESERVED --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J604 (Main Discrete)
J604 on GIA
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 ANNUNCIATE* 22 Out
2 VOICE ALERT 500 AUDIO OUT HI Out
3 VOICE ALERT 500 AUDIO OUT LO Out
4 DISCRETE IN 13 In
5 DISCRETE IN 14 In
6 ANNUNCIATE* 1 Out
7 DISCRETE IN* 1 In
8 DISCRETE IN* 2 In
9 DISCRETE IN* 3 In
10 DISCRETE IN 15 In
11 AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT IN In
12 DISCRETE IN* 4 In
22 GIA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
23 GIA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O

190-01579-00 Revision D
J605 (I/O 1)
J605 on GIA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RADAR ALTIMETER DC HI† In
2 RADAR ALTIMETER DC LO† In
3 DISCRETE IN 18A In
4 SPARE --
5 SPARE --
6 SPARE --
7 SPARE --
8 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH +UP In
9 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH +DOWN In
10 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL +RIGHT In
11 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL +LEFT In
13 POTENTIOMETER SIGNAL IN† In
14 POTENTIOMETER REF IN HI† In
15 POTENTIOMETER REF IN LO† In
17 MAIN LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT Out
18 MAIN LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT (MAIN COMMON) Out
19 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG Out
20 MAIN LATERAL –FLAG (MAIN COMMON) Out
21 SPARE --
22 SPARE --
23 MAIN VERTICAL DEVIATION +UP Out
24 MAIN VERTICAL DEVIATION +DOWN (MAIN COMMON) Out
25 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG Out
26 MAIN VERTICAL –FLAG (MAIN COMMON) Out
27 SPARE --
28 SPARE --
30 POTENTIOMETER SIGNAL OUT† Out
32 POTENTIOMETER REF OUT HI† Out
34 POTENTIOMETER REF OUT LO (GROUND)† Out
36 GIA REMOTE POWER OFF In

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 DISCRETE IN* 1A In
47 DISCRETE OUT* 1A Out
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
56 OUTER MARKER LAMP IN In
57 MIDDLE MARKER LAMP IN In
58 AIRWAY/INNER MARKER LAMP IN In
61 SIGNAL GROUND --
62 MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG Out
63 MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG Out
64 SUPERFLAG 4A Out
65 SPARE --
66 SPARE --
67 SUPERFLAG 1A Out
71 ANNUNCIATE* 1A Out
75 SUPERFLAG 2A Out
76 POWER GROUND --
77 SUPERFLAG 3A Out
78 POWER GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J606 (I/O 2)
J606 on GIA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 26 VAC VERTICAL GYRO REF HI† In
2 26 VAC VERTICAL GYRO REF LO† In
3 26 VAC ADF REF HI† In
4 26 VAC ADF REF LO† In
5 26 VAC AFCS REF HI† In
6 26 VAC AFCS REF LO† In
7 DIRECTIONAL GYRO MOTOR A† In
8 DIRECTIONAL GYRO MOTOR B† In
9 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 ADF X/COS In
11 ADF Y/SIN In
12 ADF Z (GROUND) In
13 SIGNAL GROUND --
14 HEADING X† In
15 HEADING Y† In
16 HEADING Z (GROUND)† In
17 SIGNAL GROUND --
18 PITCH ATTITUDE X† In
19 PITCH ATTITUDE Y† In
20 PITCH ATTITUDE Z (GROUND)† In
21 ROLL ATTITUDE X† In
22 ROLL ATTITUDE Y† In
23 ROLL ATTITUDE Z (GROUND)† In
24 SIGNAL GROUND --
25 SPARE --
26 SPARE --
27 SPARE --
28 SPARE --
29 RESERVED --
30 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 RESERVED --
32 ADF DC REF IN In
33 RESERVED --
34 ANALOG ROLL STEERING HI Out
35 RESERVED --
36 ANALOG ROLL STEERING LO (GROUND) Out

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 HEADING BOOTSTRAP OUT X† Out
38 HEADING BOOTSTRAP OUT Y† Out
39 HEADING BOOTSTRAP OUT Z (GROUND)† Out
40 AC ROLL ATTITUDE OUT HI† Out
41 AC ROLL ATTITUDE OUT LO (GROUND)† Out
42 AC PITCH ATTITUDE OUT HI† Out
43 AC PITCH ATTITUDE OUT LO (GROUND)† Out
44 YAW RATE +RIGHT† Out
45 YAW RATE +LEFT (GROUND)† Out
46 HEADING DATUM HI Out
47 HEADING DATUM LO (GROUND) Out
48 COURSE DATUM HI Out
49 COURSE DATUM LO (GROUND) Out
50 SIGNAL GROUND --
51 26 VAC DIRECTIONAL GYRO REF HI† In
52 26 VAC DIRECTIONAL GYRO REF LO† In
53 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE CLOCK In
54 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE DATA In
55 REMOTE ANNUNCIATE SYNC In
56 MAIN OBI CLOCK† Out
57 MAIN OBI DATA† Out
58 MAIN OBI SYNC† Out
59 MAIN KING SERIAL DME DATA I/O
60 MAIN KING SERIAL DME CLOCK I/O
61 MAIN KING SERIAL DME HOLD* OUT† Out
62 MAIN KING SERIAL DME REQUEST Out
63 MAIN KING SERIAL DME ON* OUT† Out
64 MAIN KING SERIAL RNAV REQUEST† In
65 RESERVED --
66 RESERVED --
67 DISCRETE OUT* 1B Out
76 RESERVED --
78 RESERVED --

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.4 GDC Air Data Computer
J74001
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 OAT PROBE POWER OUT Out
2 OAT PROBE IN HI In
3 OAT PROBE IN LO In
4 RS-232 IN 1 In
5 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
6 SIGNAL GROUND --
7 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 RS-232 IN 2 In
9 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
14 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
21 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out

Revision D 190-01579-00
GDC 7400, Connector J74001, continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
25 SIGNAL GROUND --
26 SIGNAL GROUND --
27 SIGNAL GROUND --
28 SIGNAL GROUND --
29 SIGNAL GROUND --
30 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 DISCRETE IN 7 In
39 DISCRETE IN 8 In
40 RESERVED --
41 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
42 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 RESERVED --
45 RESERVED --
46 RESERVED --
47 RESERVED --
48 RESERVED --
49 POWER GROUND --
50 POWER GROUND --
51 RESERVED --
52 RESERVED --
53 RESERVED --
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active Low, requiring a ground to activate.

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.5 GEA Engine and Airframe Interface Unit
J701 Connector
J701 on GEA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 DIGITAL IN* 1 In
3 DIGITAL IN* 2 In
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
5 RS 485 1 A I/O
6 RS 485 1 B I/O
7 RS 485 2 A I/O
8 RS 485 2 B I/O
9 GEA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
10 GEA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
11 TRANSDUCER POWER OUT LO (GROUND) --
14 +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT Out
17 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 6 HI In
18 ENGINE TEMP ANALOG IN 6 LO In
19 SIGNAL GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
22 ANALOG IN 1 HI In
23 ANALOG IN 1 LO In
32 SIGNAL GROUND --

Revision D 190-01579-00
Connector P701, continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
41 DIGITAL IN* 3 In
61 DIGITAL IN* 4 In
68 THERMOCOUPLE REF IN HI In
69 THERMOCOUPLE REF IN LO In
77 GEA REMOTE POWER OFF In
78 POWER GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J702 Connector
J702 on GEA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
14 +10 VDC TRANSDUCER POWER OUT A Out
17 RESERVED --
18 RESERVED --
19 RESERVED --
20 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
33 SIGNAL GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
35 SIGNAL GROUND --
36 SIGNAL GROUND --
37 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SIGNAL GROUND --
39 SIGNAL GROUND --

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
44 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 1A HI In
45 ANALOG/CURRENT MONITOR IN 1A LO In
52 ANALOG IN 1A HI In
53 ANALOG IN 1A LO In
67 DIGITAL IN* 5A In
78 SIGNAL GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.6 GRS AHRS
J78001 Connector
Pin Pin Name I/O

3 SIGNAL GROUND --
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 GPS PPS IN 1 LO In
9 GPS PPS IN 2 HI In
12 SPARE --
18 SIGNAL GROUND --
20 SPARE --
21 PPS_SELECT In
23 RS-232 IN 2 In
24 SIGNAL GROUND --
25 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
26 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
29 (CONNECTOR KEY—NO CONNECTION) --
30 SPARE --
31 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 AIR/GROUND* STATUS IN In
35 DISCRETE IN 3 In
36 DISCRETE IN 4 In
37 DISCRETE IN 5 In
38 SPARE --
39 SPARE --
40 RS-232 IN 3 In
41 RESERVED --

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
42 RESERVED --
44 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 SPARE --
49 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
50 RESERVED --
53 SIGNAL GROUND --
56 SIGNAL GROUND --
57 RESERVED --
58 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A In
59 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B In
60 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
61 POWER GROUND --
62 POWER GROUND --
64 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT Out
65 MAGNETOMETER GROUND --
A.7 GMU Magnetometer

The GMU 44 has a single connector at the end of a 6” pigtail. This connects to the GRS 7X to send it magnetic,
tilt, and temperature information via RS-422 (This is sometimes called RS-485 in system interconnect drawings to
simplify). The GMU 44 also receives messages (for testing and code upload) via RS-232 and +12 V DC power
through the pigtail.
Pin Pin Name I/O
1 SHIELD GROUND --
2 RS-485 OUT B Out
3 SHIELD GROUND --
4 RS-485 OUT A Out
5 SPARE --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 SPARE --
8 RS-232 IN In
9 +12 VDC POWER In
View of GMU 44 Connector Looking at Pigtail

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.8 GMA Audio Processor and Marker Beacon Receiver
J3471 Connector
J3471 on GMA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 FAIL SAFE WARN AUDIO IN In
2 TRANSCEIVER 4 MIC KEY* OUT Out
3 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI In
4 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN LO In
5 RESERVED --
6 RECEIVER 1 AUDIO IN HI (DIFFERENTIAL) In
7 ON-SIDE COM AUDIO IN HI In
8 ON-SIDE COM AUDIO LO (GROUND) --
9 ON-SIDE CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
10 ON-SIDE CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out
11 ON-SIDE CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
12 TRANSCEIVER 2 AUDIO IN HI In
13 TRANSCEIVER 2 AUDIO LO (GROUND) --
16 RECEIVER 5 AUDIO IN LO (DIFFERENTIAL) In
17 MUSIC 1 AUDIO IN LEFT In
18 MUSIC 1 AUDIO IN RIGHT In
19 ALERT 4 AUDIO IN HI (DIFFERENTIAL) In
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 TRANSCEIVER 4 MIC AUDIO OUT HI (DIFFERENTIAL) Out
24 RESERVED --
26 ON-SIDE COM MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out
27 ON-SIDE COM MIC KEY* OUT Out
28 ON-SIDE CREW MIC AUDIO IN HI In
29 ON-SIDE CREW MIC KEY* IN In
30 ON-SIDE CREW MIC IN LO In
32 TRANSCEIVER 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 MUSIC 1 AUDIO IN LO In
39 ALERT 3,4,5 AUDIO IN LO (DIFFERENTIAL) In
40 CROSS-SIDE BUS OUT 1 B Out
41 CROSS-SIDE BUS OUT 1 A Out
42 TRANSCEIVER 4 AUDIO IN HI (DIFFERENTIAL) In
43 TRANSCEIVER 4 AUDIO IN LO (DIFFERENTIAL) In
44 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI In
45 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO (GROUND) --
48 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
49 SECONDARY CREW MIC AUDIO IN HI In
50 SECONDARY CREW MIC KEY* IN In
51 SECONDARY CREW MIC IN LO In
53 SUMMED AUDIO OUT LO (GROUND) --
55 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO (DIFFERENTIAL) In
56 MUSIC 2 AUDIO IN LEFT In
57 MUSIC 2 AUDIO IN RIGHT In
58 TRANSCEIVER 3 AUDIO IN HI In
59 TRANSCEIVER 3 AUDIO LO (GROUND) --
60 CROSS-SIDE BUS IN 1 A In
61 CROSS-SIDE BUS IN 1 B In
62 TRANSCEIVER 4 MIC AUDIO OUT LO (DIFFERENTIAL) Out
67 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
68 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out
69 SECONDARY CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT LEFT Out
70 SECONDARY CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT RIGHT Out
71 SECONDARY CREW HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO Out
72 SUMMED AUDIO OUT HI Out
73 RESERVED --
76 MUSIC 2 AUDIO IN LO In
77 TRANSCEIVER 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI Out

190-01579-00 Revision D
J3472 Connector
J3472 on GMA
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RESERVED --
2 ETHERNET IN B In
4 RESERVED --
5 RESERVED --
6 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
7 RS-232 IN 1 In
8 ON-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
9 ON-SIDE COM DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
10 OXYGEN MASK MIC SELECT* IN In
11 ON-SIDE CREW ICS KEY* IN In
12 SECONDARY CREW ICS KEY* IN In
13 FORCE FAILSAFE* In
14 POWER GROUND In
15 RESERVED --
16 POWER GROUND --
17 COM SWAP* IN In
18 PROGRAM GROUND --
19 RESERVED --
20 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 ETHERNET IN A In
24 GMA SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* In
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
28 ON-SIDE NAV DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
29 ON-SIDE VOICE ALERT DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
31 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED --
38 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
39 RS-232 IN 2 In
40 RESERVED --
41 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO Out
42 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI Out
43 RESERVED --
44 PROGRAM GROUND Out
45 RESERVED --
46 PROGRAM GROUND Out
47 CROSS-SIDE COM MIC DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
48 CROSS-SIDE COM DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
49 RESERVED --
50 RESERVED --
51 RESERVED --
52 RESERVED --
54 RESERVED --
56 RESERVED --
57 RESERVED --
58 RESERVED --
59 MARKER ANTENNA LO In
60 RESERVED --
61 CROSS-SIDE VOICE ALERT DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
62 RESERVED --
63 RESERVED --
64 PA MUTE* OUT Out
65 RESERVED --
66 RESERVED --
68 CROSS-SIDE NAV DIGITAL AUDIO IN In
69 POWER GROUND --
70 RESERVED --
71 POWER GROUND --
72 RESERVED --
73 RESERVED --
74 RESERVED --
75 RESERVED --
76 RESERVED --
77 COCKPIT CALL SELECT* In
78 MARKER ANTENNA HI In

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.9 GDL 69A XM Weather and Radio Data Link
J691 on GDL 69
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin # Name I/O Notes

1 Config Module Ground Out
2 RS-232 Out 2 Out
3 RS-232 Out 3 Out
4 Signal Ground --
5 RS-232 In 2 In
6 RS-232 In 3 In
7 RS-232 In 1 In SW Version 3.10 or higher
8 RS-232 Out 1 Out SW Version 3.10 or higher
9 Reserved --
10 Reserved --
11 Signal Ground --
12 Spare --
13 Signal Ground --
14 Spare --
15 Spare --
16 Spare --
17 Audio Out 1 Lo (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only
18 Audio Out 1 Right (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only
19 Audio Out 1 Left (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only
20 Power Ground --
21 Config Module Power Out Out
22 Ethernet In 1 B In
23 Ethernet In 1 A In
24 Ethernet Out 1 B Out
25 Ethernet Out 1 A Out
34 Spare --
35 Aircraft Power 1 In
36 Spare --
37 Aircraft Power 2 In
38 Spare --
39 Signal Ground --
40 Config Module Data I/O
41 Spare --
42 Spare --
43 Spare --
Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin # Name I/O Notes
44 Spare --
45 Spare --
46 Spare --
47 Spare --
48 Spare --
49 Spare --
50 Spare --
51 Spare --
52 Line Out Lo (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only (Note 1)
53 Line Out Right (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only (Note 1)
54 Line Out Left (Spare For GDL 69) Out GDL 69A/69AH Only (Note 1)
55 Spare --
60 Config Module Clock Out
61 Audio Suppression Select 1 (Spare For GDL 69) In GDL 69A/69AH Only
64 Audio Suppression Select* 4 (Spare For GDL 69) In GDL 69A/69AH Only
67 Discrete In* 2 (Audio Channel Control) In GDL 69A/69AH Only
68 Reserved -- For Factory Use Only
69 Reserved -- For Factory Use Only
70 Audio Mute* In
71 Channel Increment* In
72 Channel Decrement* In
73 Volume Increment* In
74 Volume Decrement* In
75 Signal Ground --
76 Spare --
77 Data Link Remote Power Off In
78 Power Ground --

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.10 GDL 59 Wi-Fi Datalink and Flight Parameter Recorder
J591 Connector
J591 on GDL 59
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 USER ETHERNET OUT 5 A Out
2 USER ETHERNET IN 5 A In
3 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 2 A Out
4 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 2 A In
9 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 1 A Out
10 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 1 A In
11 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 SPARE --
13 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 2 HI In
14 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 2 HI Out
15 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 1 HI In
16 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 1 HI Out
17 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO IN HI In
18 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO OUT HI Out
19 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO IN HI In
20 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO OUT HI Out
21 USER ETHERNET OUT 5 B Out
22 USER ETHERNET IN 5 B In
23 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 2 B Out
24 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 2 B In
29 AVIONICS ETHERNET OUT 1 B Out
30 AVIONICS ETHERNET IN 1 B In
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 2 LO In
33 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 2 LO Out
34 IRIDIUM AUDIO IN 1 LO In
35 IRIDIUM AUDIO OUT 1 LO Out
36 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO IN LO In
37 AUDIO SYSTEM 2 AUDIO OUT LO Out
38 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO IN LO In
* Denotes Active Low (Ground to activate)

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
39 AUDIO SYSTEM 1 AUDIO OUT LO Out
40 RESERVED I/O
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 RESERVED --
44 SIGNAL GROUND --
45 SIGNAL GROUND --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 RESERVED --
50 RESERVED --
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 POWER GROUND --
53 POWER GROUND --
54 POWER GROUND --
55 POWER GROUND --
56 IRIDIUM 1 STATUS DISCRETE 1* IN In
57 SPARE --
58 RESERVED --
59 POTS HANDSET RING I/O
60 RESERVED I/O
61 RESERVED In
62 RESERVED --
63 RS232 OUT 1 Out
64 RS232 IN 1 In
65 RS232 OUT 2 Out
66 RS232 IN 2 In
67 RESERVED --
68 RESERVED --
69 RESERVED --
70 RESERVED --
73 IRIDIUM 1 REMOTE POWER ON* Out
74 IRIDIUM 2 REMOTE POWER ON* Out
75 DATA LINK REMOTE POWER OFF In
76 IRIDIUM 2 STATUS DISCRETE* IN In
77 RESERVED --
78 POTS HANDSET TIP I/O

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.11 GSR Iridium Satellite Transceiver
J561 Connector
J561 on GSR
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 AUDIO OUT HI Out
2 AUDIO OUT LO Out
3 POWER GROUND --
4 AUDIO IN HI In
5 AUDIO IN LO In
6 POWER GROUND --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 SIGNAL GROUND --
12 RS-232 OUT Out
13 RS-232 IN In
14 SIGNAL GROUND --
15 RESERVED --
16 IRIDIUM REMOTE POWER ON* In
17 POWER GROUND --
18 RESERVED --
19 POWER GROUND --
20 RESERVED --
21 HEATER POWER In
22 HEATER 1 HI --
23 POWER GROUND --
24 SPARE --
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
28 RESERVED --
29 RESERVED --
30 RESERVED --
31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT Out
*Denotes Active Low (Ground to activate)

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
36 HEATER POWER In
37 HEATER 2 HI --
38 HEATER 1 LO --
39 RESERVED --
40 RESERVED --
41 RESERVED --
42 RESERVED --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 RESERVED --
*Denotes Active Low (Ground to activate)
A.12 GMC Autopilot Mode Controller

J7101
J7101 on GMC
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
2 RS-232 IN 1 In
3 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
4 RS-232 IN 2 In
5 POWER GROUND --
6 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 SIGNAL GROUND --
CONTROL UNIT REMOTE POWER OFF (GMC 705/710/715 Only) In
10
RESERVED (GMC 720) --
13 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 POWER GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.13 GWX Airborne Weather Radar
J751 on GWX
Pin Pin Name I/O
1 USB DATA HI I/O
2 USB DATA LO I/O
3 ETHERNET IN B In
4 ETHERNET IN A In
5 POWER GROUND --
6 26 VAC GYRO REF HI In
7 26 VAC GYRO REF LO In
8 POWER GROUND --
11 POWER GROUND --
14 POWER GROUND --
15 RESERVED --
16 RESERVED --
21 USB GROUND --
24 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
25 ROLL ATTITUDE HI In
26 ROLL ATTITUDE LO In
27 SIGNAL GROUND --
28 ARINC 429 IN 3B In
29 ARINC 429 IN 3A In
30 ARINC 429 OUT A Out
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --
35 RESERVED --
40 USB VBUS POWER Out

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin Pin Name I/O
44 PITCH ATTITUDE HI In
45 PITCH ATTITUDE LO In
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 RESERVED --
48 RESERVED --
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 RESERVED --
51 RESERVED --
52 SIGNAL GROUND --
53 RESERVED --
54 ANTENNA SELECT* 1 In
55 ANTENNA SELECT* 0 In
56 RADAR REMOTE POWER OFF* In
57 SIGNAL GROUND --
58 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
59 RS-232 IN 2 In
62 ARINC 453 OUT B Out
63 ARINC 453 OUT A Out
64 SIGNAL GROUND --
65 RESERVED --
66 RESERVED --
67 SIGNAL GROUND --
68 RESERVED --
69 RESERVED --
70 SIGNAL GROUND --
73 ARINC 429 OUT B Out
74 RS-232 IN 1 In
75 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
76 SIGNAL GROUND --
77 RS-232 IN 3 In
78 RS-232 OUT 3 Out

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.14 GSD Data Concentrator
J411 Connector
J411 on GSD
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin I/O
Pin Name
1 RESERVED --
21 RESERVED --
22 MAIN1 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
23 MAIN1 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin I/O
Pin Name
40 RESERVED --
46 POWER GROUND --
47 POWER GROUND --
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 SIGNAL GROUND --
60 RESERVED --
66 MAIN1 ARINC 429 OUT 4 A Out
67 MAIN1 ARINC 429 OUT 4 B Out
69 GSD SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
70 GSD SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
78 GSD REMOTE POWER OFF In

190-01579-00 Revision D
J412 Connector
J412 on GSD
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin I/O
Pin Name
1 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 1 A I/O
2 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 1 B I/O
3 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 2 A I/O
4 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 2 B I/O
5 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 3 A I/O
6 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 3 B I/O
7 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 4 A I/O
8 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 4 B I/O
9 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 5 A I/O
10 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 5 B I/O
11 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 6 A I/O
12 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 6 B I/O
13 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 7 A I/O
14 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 7 B I/O
15 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 8 A I/O
16 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 8 B I/O
17 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 9 A I/O
18 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 9 B I/O
19 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 10 A I/O
20 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 10 B I/O
21 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 11 A I/O
22 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 11 B I/O
23 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 12 A I/O
24 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 12 B I/O
25 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 13 A I/O
26 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 13 B I/O
27 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 14 A I/O
28 MAIN2 RS-485/RS-422 14 B I/O

Revision D 190-01579-00
Pin I/O
Pin Name
45 In
DISCRETE IN 13A
47 In
DISCRETE IN 15A
48 SIGNAL GROUND --
49 --
SIGNAL GROUND
50 SIGNAL GROUND --
51 In
MAIN2 ARINC 429 IN 1 A
53 In
55 In
57 In
59 In
DISCRETE IN 16A

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.15 GSA Servo Actuator
J90001
J90001 on GSA
Pin Pin Name I/O
A AP DISCONNECT In
B RS-485 2 B I/O
C SERVO PROGRAM 4A (/DISCRETE IN* 1) In
D SERVO PROGRAM 3 In
E SERVO PROGRAM 2 In
F SERVO PROGRAM 1 In
G RS-485 1 A I/O
H RS-485 1 B I/O
J AIRCRAFT POWER 2 In
K RESERVED --
L RS-485 1 B I/O
M RS-485 1 A I/O
N RS-485 2 B I/O
P RS-485 2 A I/O
R RS-485 2 A I/O
S PROGRAM GROUND --
T PROGRAM GROUND --
U PROGRAM GROUND --
V SERVO PROGRAM 4B (/DISCRETE IN* 2) In
W AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
X RESERVED --
Y POWER GROUND 2 --
Z POWER GROUND 1 --

Revision D 190-01579-00
A.16 GTA Trim Adaptor
J821
J821 on GTA
Pin Pin Name I/O
1 MANUAL TRIM CW* In
2 AIRCRAFT POWER In
3 POWER GROUND --
4 SERVO ENABLE In
5 AP DISCONNECT In
6 SERVO PROGRAM 1 In
9 MOTOR CW Out
10 MANUAL TRIM ARM* In
11 MANUAL TRIM CCW* In
12 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED --
18 MOTOR COMMON Out
19 MANUAL TRIM ENABLE* In
20 RS-485 2 A I/O
21 RS-485 2 B I/O
22 RS-485 1 B I/O
23 RS-485 1 A I/O
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 MOTOR CCW Out
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active Low, requiring a ground to activate

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.17 GTS TCAS II System
J8001 (Digital)
J8001on GTS
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

2 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
3 RS-232 IN 1 In
4 SIGNAL GROUND --
5 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
6 RS-232 IN 2 In
7 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
9 RS-232 IN 3 In
10 SIGNAL GROUND --
11 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
12 RS-232 IN 4 In
13 SIGNAL GROUND --
18 SIGNAL GROUND --
19 GPS PPS 1 IN In
20 SIGNAL GROUND --
22 SIGNAL GROUND --
27 SIGNAL GROUND --
32 SIGNAL GROUND --
37 RS-422 IN A In
38 RS-422 IN B In

Revision D 190-01579-00
Connector J8001 continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
41 SIGNAL GROUND --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
54 ETHERNET IN A In
55 ETHERNET IN B In
56 SIGNAL GROUND --
57 RS-422 OUT A Out
58 RS-422 OUT B Out
59 SIGNAL GROUND --
61 RESERVED --
62 RESERVED --
63 RESERVED --
64 RESERVED --
65 RESERVED --
66 RESERVED --
67 RESERVED --
68 RESERVED --
69 SPARE --
70 SPARE --
71 SPARE --
72 SPARE --
75 USB VBUS POWER In
76 USB DATA HI I/O
77 USB DATA LO I/O
78 USB GROUND --

190-01579-00 Revision D
J8002 (Analog/Discrete)
J8002 on GTS
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name Applicable Model** I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
RA DISPLAY STATUS VALID* 1 GTS 8000 In
2
RESERVED GTS 855/GTS 825 --
RA DISPLAY STATUS VALID* 2 GTS 8000 In
3
4 RESERVED --
5 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 AIR/GROUND* In
7 SPARE --
8 TRAFFIC DISPLAY 1 STATUS VALID* In
9 TRAFFIC DISPLAY 2 STATUS VALID* In
10 GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED* In
11 ADVISORY INHIBIT* 1 In
12 ADVISORY CANCEL* In
13 RESERVED --
14 SELF TEST INHIBIT PROGRAM* In
CLIMB INHIBIT* 1 GTS 8000 In
15
CLIMB INHIBIT* 2 GTS 8000 In
16
INCREASED CLIMB INHIBIT* 1 GTS 8000 In
17
INCREASED CLIMB INHIBIT* 2 GTS 8000 In
18
PERFORMANCE LIMIT* GTS 8000 In
19
20 RESERVED --
21 SIGNAL GROUND --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
28 RESERVED --
29 RESERVED --
30 RESERVED --
*Denotes that the signal is Active Low.
**Items in this column denote pin information specific to the listed model. Pin information applies to all models (GTS 8000,
GTS 855, and GTS 825) if blank.

Revision D 190-01579-00
31 RESERVED --
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 RESERVED --
38 RESERVED --
39 SIGNAL GROUND --
40 SIGNAL GROUND --
41 HEADING X HI In
42 HEADING X LO (GROUND) --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
44 HEADING Y HI In
45 HEADING Y LO (GROUND) --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
47 SPARE --
48 EXTERNAL SUPPRESSION I/O I/O
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
ANNUN* 1 (CORRECTIVE RA) GTS 8000 Out
50
ANNUN* 1 (TA DISPLAY ENABLE) GTS 855/GTS 825 Out
51 ANNUN* 2 (AURAL TA) Out
52 SPARE --
ANNUN* 3 (PREVENTIVE RA) GTS 8000 Out
53
ANNUN* 3 (VISUAL TA) GTS 855/GTS 825 Out
54 TRAFFIC SYSTEM STATUS VALID* Out
55 RESERVED --
ADVISORY INHIBIT* 2 GTS 8000 In
56
57 SIGNAL GROUND --
58 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI Out
59 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO Out
60 HEADING Z HI (GROUND) In
61 HEADING Z LO (GROUND) --
62 SIGNAL GROUND --
63 26 VAC HEADING REF HI In
64 26 VAC HEADING REF LO In
65 SIGNAL GROUND --
66 SPARE --
67 SPARE --
68 HEADING VALID In
69 HEADING VALID* In
70 SIGNAL GROUND --
71 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER HI In
72 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER LO In
**Items in this column specify pin information specific to the listed model. Pin information applies to all models (GTS 8000,

190-01579-00 Revision D
73 SIGNAL GROUND --
74 SELF TEST INITIALIZE SELECT* In
75 TRAFFIC OPERATE/STANDBY* In
76 ANALOG RADAR ALTIMETER VALID In
77 SPARE --
78 SIGNAL GROUND --
**Items in this column specify pin information specific to the listed model. Pin information applies to all models (GTS 8000,

Revision D 190-01579-00
J8003 (Power Supply)
J8003 on GTS power supply
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 POWER GROUND --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 RESERVED --
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 POWER GROUND --
12 RESERVED --
13 RESERVED --
14 POWER GROUND --
15 RESERVED --
16 RESERVED --
17 POWER GROUND --
18 TRAFFIC SYSTEM REMOTE POWER ON* In
19 POWER GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 POWER GROUND --
22 POWER GROUND --
23 POWER GROUND --
24 POWER GROUND --
25 POWER GROUND --
26 POWER GROUND --
27 POWER GROUND --
28 POWER GROUND --
29 POWER GROUND --
30 POWER GROUND --
31 POWER GROUND --
32 POWER GROUND --
33 POWER GROUND --
34 POWER GROUND --
35 POWER GROUND --
36 TRAFFIC SYSTEM REMOTE POWER OFF In
37 POWER GROUND --
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is Active Low.

190-01579-00 Revision D
A.18 GCU PFD Controller
J4751
J4751on GCU
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
2 RS-232 IN 1 In
3 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
4 RS-232 IN 2 In
5 POWER GROUND --
6 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 SIGNAL GROUND --
CONTROL UNIT REMOTE POWER OFF (GCU 475/476/477/478 Only) In
10
RESERVED (GCU 275) --
13 RESERVED (TEST MODE SELECT*) --
14 RESERVED --
15 POWER GROUND --

Revision D 190-01579-00
APPENDIX B — AFM/AFMS/POH CONSIDERATIONS
The following information may be published in the approved AFM, AFMS, and/or POH provided the system is
installed in accordance with AC 20-138A and is comprised of two TSO-C145a Class 3 approved Garmin GIA
63Ws, two/three TSO-C146a Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display Units, Garmin GA36 and GA37
antennas, and GPS software version 3.2 or later approved version:
NOTE
Text contained in brackets “[ ]” is meant to serve as an example and will need to be modified in
order to reflect the actual installation.
B.1 GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT APPROVALS
The Garmin GNSS navigation system installed in this aircraft is a GPS system with a Satellite Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) comprised of [two TSO-C145a Class 3 approved Garmin GIA 63Ws, TSO-C146a
Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display Units, Garmin GA36 and GA37 antennas, and GPS software
version 3.2 or later approved version]. The Garmin GNSS navigation system in this aircraft is installed in
accordance with AC 20-138A.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the requirements of AC 20-138A
and is approved for navigation using GPS and SBAS (within the coverage of a Satellite Based Augmentation
System complying with ICAO Annex 10) for IFR en route, terminal area, and non-precision approach operations
(including those approaches titled “GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV (GPS)” approaches). The Garmin GNSS
navigation system installed in this aircraft is approved for approach procedures with vertical guidance including
“LPV” and “LNAV/VNAV”, within the U.S. National Airspace System.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment requirements of AC
90-105 and meets the equipment performance and functional requirements to conduct RNP terminal departure and
arrival procedures and RNP approach procedures without RF (radius to fix) legs. Part 91 subpart K, 121, 125,
129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the FAA.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment requirements of
AC 90-100A for RNAV 2 and RNAV 1 operations. In accordance with AC 90-100A, Part 91 operators (except
subpart K) following the aircraft and training guidance in AC 90-100A are authorized to fly RNAV 2 and RNAV
1 procedures. Part 91 subpart K, 121, 125, 129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the FAA.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft has been found to comply with the requirements
for primary means of Class II navigation in oceanic and remote navigation (RNP-10) without time limitations in
accordance with AC 20-138A and FAA Order 8400.12A. The Garmin GNSS navigation system can be used
without reliance on other long-range navigation systems. This does not constitute an operational approval.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft has been found to comply with the navigation
requirements for primary means of Class II navigation in oceanic and remote navigation (RNP-4) in accordance
with AC 20-138A and FAA Order 8400.33. The Garmin GNSS navigation system can be used without reliance
on other long-range navigation systems. Additional equipment may be required to obtain operational approval to
utilize RNP-4 performance. This does not constitute an operational approval.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the accuracy, integrity, and
continuity of function, and contains the minimum system functions required for PRNAV operations in accordance
with JAA Administrative & Guidance Material Section One: General Part 3: Temporary Guidance Leaflets,
Leaflet No 10 (JAA TGL-10 Rev 1). The GNSS navigation system has [two ETSO-145 / TSO-C145a Class 3
approved Garmin GIA 63Ws, and ETSO-146 / TSO-C146a Class 3 approved Garmin GDU 1XXX Display
Units]. The Garmin GNSS navigation system as installed in this aircraft complies with the equipment
requirements for PRNAV and BRNAV operations in accordance with AC 90-96A and JAA TGL-10 Rev 1. This
does not constitute an operational approval.
G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page B-1

190-01579-00 Revision D
Garmin International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153 for
database integrity, quality, and database management practices for the Navigation database. Pilots and operators
can view the LOA status at www.garmin.com > Aviation Databases > Type 2 LOA Status.
Navigation information is referenced to WGS-84 reference system.
B.2 GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The pilot must confirm at system initialization that the Navigation database is current.
Navigation database is expected to be current for the duration of the flight. If the AIRAC cycle will change
during flight, the pilot must ensure the accuracy of navigation data, including suitability of navigation facilities
used to define the routes and procedures for flight. If an amended chart affecting navigation data is published for
the procedure, the database must not be used to conduct the procedure.
GPS/SBAS based IFR enroute, oceanic, and terminal navigation is prohibited unless the pilot verifies and uses a
valid, compatible, and current Navigation database or verifies each waypoint for accuracy by reference to current
approved data.
Discrepancies that invalidate a procedure must be reported to Garmin International. The affected procedure is
prohibited from being flown using data from the Navigation database until a new Navigation database is installed
in the aircraft and verified that the discrepancy has been corrected. Contact information to report Navigation
database discrepancies can be found at www.garmin.com > Support > Contact Garmin Support > Aviation. Pilots
and operators can view navigation data base alerts at www.garmin.com > In the Air > NavData Alerts.
For flight planning purposes, in areas where SBAS coverage is not available, the pilot must check RAIM
availability. Within the United States, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE Prediction
program, [part number 006-A0154-01 (included in trainer software) version 3.00 or later approved version with
GARMIN GA36 and GA37 antennas selected], or the FAA’s en route and terminal RAIM prediction website:
www.raimprediction.net, or by contacting a Flight Service Station.
Within Europe, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE Prediction program or Europe’s
AUGER GPS RAIM Prediction Tool at http://augur.ecacnav.com/augur/app/home. For other areas, use the Garmin
WFDE Prediction program. This requirement is not necessary if SBAS coverage is confirmed to be available
along the entire route of flight. The route planning and WFDE prediction program may be downloaded from the
Garmin website on the internet. For information on using the WFDE Prediction Program, refer to Garmin WAAS
FDE Prediction Program, part number 190-00643-01, ‘WFDE Prediction Program Instructions’.
For flight planning purposes, operations within the U.S. National Airspace System on RNP and RNAV
procedures when SBAS signals are not available, the availability of GPS integrity RAIM shall be confirmed for
the intended route of flight. In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than five minutes for
any part of the intended route of flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or re-routed on a track where
RAIM requirements can be met.
For flight planning purposes for operations within European B-RNAV and P-RNAV airspace, if more than one
satellite is scheduled to be out of service, then the availability of GPS integrity RAIM shall be confirmed for the
intended flight (route and time). In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than five minutes
for any part of the intended flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or re-routed on a track where RAIM
requirements can be met.
For flight planning purposes, operations where the route requires Class II navigation the aircraft’s operator or
pilot-in-command must use the Garmin WFDE Prediction program to demonstrate that there are no outages on the
specified route that would prevent the Garmin GNSS navigation system to provide primary means of Class II
navigation in oceanic and remote areas of operation that requires (RNP-10 or RNP-4) capability. If the Garmin
WFDE Prediction program indicates fault exclusion (FDE) availability will exceed 34 minutes in accordance with
FAA Order 8400.12A for RNP-10 requirements, or 25 minutes in accordance with FAA Order 8400.33 for RNP-4
requirements, then the operation must be rescheduled when FDE is available.
Page B-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Revision D 190-01579-00
Both Garmin GPS navigation receivers must be operating and providing GPS navigation guidance to their
respective PFD for operations requiring RNP-4 performance.
North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum Navigational Performance Specifications (MNPS) Airspace operations per AC
91-49 and AC 120-33 require both GPS/SBAS receivers to be operating and receiving usable signals except for
routes requiring only one Long Range Navigation sensor. Each display computes an independent navigation
solution based on the on-side GPS sensor. However, either display will automatically revert to the cross-side
sensor if the on-side sensor fails or if the cross-side sensor is determined to be more accurate. [On G2000
installations a “BOTH ON GPS1” or “BOTH ON GPS2” message does not necessarily mean that one GPS has
failed. Refer to the MFD AUX-GPS STATUS page to determine the state of the unused GPS].
Whenever possible, RNP and RNAV routes including Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs) and Obstacle
Departure Procedures (ODPs), Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR), and enroute RNAV “Q” and RNAV “T”
routes should be loaded into the flight plan from the database in their entirety, rather than loading route waypoints
from the database into the flight plan individually. Selecting and inserting individual named fixes from the
database is permitted, provided all fixes along the published route to be flown are inserted. Manual entry of
waypoints using latitude/longitude or place/bearing is prohibited.
“GPS”, “or GPS”, and “RNAV (GPS)” instrument approaches using the Garmin navigation systems are
prohibited unless the pilot verifies and uses the current Navigation database. GPS based instrument approaches
must be flown in accordance with an approved instrument approach procedure that is loaded from the Navigation
database.
Not all published Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP) are in the Navigation database. Pilots planning on
flying an RNAV instrument approach must ensure that the Navigation database contains the planned RNAV
Instrument Approach Procedure and that approach procedure must be loaded from the Navigation database into
the FMS flight plan by its name.
IFR non-precision approach approval using the GPS/SBAS sensor is limited to published approaches within the
U.S. National Airspace System. Approaches to airports in other airspace are not approved unless authorized by
the appropriate governing authority.
The navigation equipment required to join and fly an instrument approach procedure is indicated by the title of the
procedure and notes on the IAP chart. Use of the Garmin GPS/SBAS receivers to provide navigation guidance
during the final approach segment of an ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS or any other type of approach not
approved for “or GPS” navigation is prohibited. When using the Garmin VOR/LOC/GS receivers to fly the final
approach segment, VOR/LOC/GS navigation data must be selected and presented on the CDI of the pilot flying.
Navigation information is referenced to WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used where the
Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to WGS-84 or
equivalent.
G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page B-3

190-01579-00 Revision D
Blank Page
Page B-4 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Revision D 190-01579-00

Garmin g3000 190-01597-00 - D PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Garmin g3000 190-01597-00 - D PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

G3000™ Integrated Avionics System

Line Maintenance Manual

190-01597-00 November 2014 Revision D

Garmin International, Inc.

Garmin Ltd. (Europe)

Revision Date Section Pages Description

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

4.6.4.5 GEA Page Group ................................................................................................................ 4-102

SECTION 5 — LRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

SECTION 6 — LRU SOFTWARE LOADING, CONFIGURATION, and TESTING

SECTION 7 — PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

7.1.22 GTA Trim Adapter ................................................................................................................. 7-3

8.11.4 VHF COM Tests .................................................................................................................. 8-21

APPENDIX A — LRU CONNECTOR PIN DESCRIPTIONS

APPENDIX B — AFM/AFMS/POH CONSIDERATIONS

Page 1-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 1-3

Page 1-4 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

2.1 SYSTEM/LRU DESCRIPTIONS

LRU Description Notes

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 2-1

Page 2-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 2-3

PFD1 GTC1 MFD GTC2 PFD2

GSD1 GSD2 GWX

PFD1 GTC1 MFD GTC2 PFD2

Figure 2-1. Generic G3000 System

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-1

Figure 3-2. PFD1 Power Up Figure 3-3. MFD Power Up

Page 3-2 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

3.2 G3000 CONTROLS

Figure 3-5. PFD Softkeys

Figure 3-6. GTC Touchscreen Controller

Page 3-4 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Figure 3-7. Touchscreen Controller Screen Navigation

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-5

Figure 3-8. Accessing Screens with the CNS Bar

Figure 3-9. Button Bar Displays System-Level Buttons

Page 3-6 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Figure 3-11. Label Bar Indicates Context-Sensitive Joystick

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-7

Map Detail Adjustment Slider

Figure 3-13. Touchscreen Controller with Tabs and Scroll Arrows

Figure 3-14. Subdued Buttons on Touchscreen Controller

Figure 3-15. Touchscreen Controller Annunciator Buttons

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-9

Figure 3-17. Failed Buttons on Touchscreen Controller

Page 3-10 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-11

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-13

Page 3-14 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-15

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-17

Figure 3-18. GCU 275 GDU Controller

Page 3-18 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-19

Page 3-20 G3000 Line Maintenance Manual

Figure 3-20. Display Bezel SD Card Slots

G3000 Line Maintenance Manual Page 3-21

Aircraft System Software Loader card

Jeppesen Navigation Database

Supplemental Database Card

Four Different Cards Typically Used in G3000 Installations: